Fagor America Computer Hardware CNC8070 User Manual
(REF. 0509)  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
OPERATING MANUAL  
(Soft V03.0x)  
(Ref. 0509)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Unauthorized copying or distributing of this software is prohibited.  
All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be transmitted, transcribed, stored in a backup device  
or translated into another language without Fagor Automation’s consent.  
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, U.S.A.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
P R E L I M I N A R Y W A R N I N G S  
MACHINE SAFETY  
It is up to the machine manufacturer to make sure that the safety of the machine is enabled  
in order to prevent personal injury and damage to the CNC or to the products connected to it.  
On start-up and while validating CNC parameters, it checks the status of the following safety  
elements:  
• Feedback alarm for analog axes.  
• Software limits for analog and sercos linear axes.  
• Following error monitoring for analog and sercos axes (except the spindle) both at the  
CNC and at the drives.  
• Tendency test on analog axes.  
If any of them is disabled, the CNC shows a warning message and it must be enabled to  
guarantee a safe working environment.  
FAGOR AUTOMATION shall not be held responsible for any personal injuries or physical  
damage caused or suffered by the CNC resulting from any of the safety elements being  
disabled.  
HARDWARE EXPANSIONS  
FAGOR AUTOMATION shall not be held responsible for any personal injuries or physical  
damage caused or suffered by the CNC resulting from any hardware manipulation by  
personnel unauthorized by Fagor Automation.  
If the CNC hardware is modified by personnel unauthorized by Fagor Automation, it will no  
longer be under warranty.  
COMPUTER VIRUSES  
FAGOR AUTOMATION guarantees thatthesoftwareinstalled contains no computer viruses.  
It is up to the user to keep the unit virus free in order to guarantee its proper operation.  
Computer viruses at the CNC may cause it to malfunction. An antivirus software is highly  
recommended iftheCNC is connecteddirectly to anotherPC, itispartof acomputernetwork  
or floppy disks or other computer media is used to transmit data.  
FAGOR AUTOMATION shall not be held responsible for any personal injuries or physical  
damage caused or suffered by the CNC due a computer virus in the system.  
If a computer virus is found in the system, the unit will no longer be under warranty.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
I N D E X  
CHAPTER 1  
GENERAL CONCEPTS  
1.1  
1.2  
CNC configuration. Hardware.................................................................................... 1  
Turning the CNC on and off....................................................................................... 3  
Emergency shutdown with battery......................................................................... 4  
Description of the keys .............................................................................................. 5  
Keys associated with the information on the screen.............................................. 5  
Keyboard layout ..................................................................................................... 6  
Description of the operator panel........................................................................... 8  
Directory structure................................................................................................... 10  
MTB (Machine Tool Builder) directory.................................................................. 11  
USERS directory ................................................................................................. 12  
1.2.1  
1.3  
1.3.1  
1.3.2  
1.3.3  
1.4  
1.4.1  
1.4.2  
CHAPTER 2  
HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC  
2.1  
Screen description................................................................................................... 13  
2.1.1  
2.2  
2.2.1  
2.2.2  
2.3  
2.4  
2.5  
2.6  
2.6.1  
2.7  
Detailed description of the CNC status bar.......................................................... 14  
Operating modes..................................................................................................... 16  
How to access to the operating modes................................................................ 16  
Description of the various operating modes ........................................................ 18  
Dialog boxes ............................................................................................................ 20  
Windows for warnings and errors ............................................................................ 21  
File selection window............................................................................................... 22  
Calculator ................................................................................................................ 25  
Defining expressions............................................................................................ 27  
Keyboard shortcuts.................................................................................................. 30  
CHAPTER 3  
AUTOMATIC MODE  
3.1  
Displaying the automatic mode................................................................................ 34  
3.1.1  
3.1.2  
3.1.3  
3.1.4  
3.2  
Description of the screens ................................................................................... 35  
Description of the general status bar................................................................... 36  
Channel synchronization window ........................................................................ 37  
Icon description (vertical softkeys)....................................................................... 38  
Data screen ............................................................................................................. 39  
Data screen (softkeys)............................................................................................. 41  
First block............................................................................................................. 41  
Stop condition...................................................................................................... 42  
Block search ........................................................................................................ 44  
Find text ............................................................................................................... 46  
Go to line ............................................................................................................. 46  
Graphic screen ........................................................................................................ 47  
Graphic screen (softkeys)........................................................................................ 49  
Type of graphics................................................................................................... 49  
Zoom.................................................................................................................... 50  
Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 51  
Point of view......................................................................................................... 52  
Measurement....................................................................................................... 53  
Clear screen ........................................................................................................ 53  
Colors .................................................................................................................. 54  
Options ................................................................................................................ 55  
Real coordinates.................................................................................................. 56  
Program selection and execution............................................................................. 57  
Program selection................................................................................................ 57  
Program execution............................................................................................... 58  
Tool inspection ..................................................................................................... 59  
Block search and program execution................................................................... 61  
3.3  
3.3.1  
3.3.2  
3.3.3  
3.3.4  
3.3.5  
3.4  
3.5  
3.5.1  
3.5.2  
3.5.3  
3.5.4  
3.5.5  
3.5.6  
3.5.7  
3.5.8  
3.5.9  
3.6  
3.6.1  
3.6.2  
3.6.3  
3.6.4  
CNC 8070  
CHAPTER 4  
MANUAL (JOG) MODE  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
4.1  
Appearance of the Manual (JOG) mode.................................................................. 64  
4.1.1  
4.1.2  
Description of a typical screen of this work mode................................................ 65  
Vertical softkey menu (icons)............................................................................... 66  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.2  
Operations with the axes ......................................................................................... 67  
Home search ....................................................................................................... 67  
Jogging the axes.................................................................................................. 68  
Jogging the axes with handwheels...................................................................... 70  
Moving an axis to a particular position (coordinate) ............................................ 72  
Coordinate preset................................................................................................ 73  
Spindle control......................................................................................................... 74  
Tool selection and tool change ................................................................................ 75  
Definition of cutting conditions................................................................................. 76  
Automatic loading of zero offsets or fixture offset tables ......................................... 77  
4.2.1  
4.2.2  
4.2.3  
4.2.4  
4.2.5  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.6  
CHAPTER 5  
MANUAL (JOG) MODE. TOOL CALIBRATION  
5.1  
5.2  
5.3  
5.3.1  
5.3.2  
Manual calibration. Calibration without a probe....................................................... 81  
Semi-automatic calibration. Calibration with a probe .............................................. 84  
Automatic calibration with a probe and a canned cycle........................................... 86  
Mill or lathe model ("trihedron" geometrical configuration).................................. 86  
Lathe model ("plane" geometrical configuration)................................................. 89  
CHAPTER 6  
EDITING-SIMULATION MODE  
6.1  
Appearance of the editing - simulation .................................................................... 92  
6.1.1  
6.1.2  
6.1.3  
6.2  
6.2.1  
6.2.2  
6.2.3  
6.3  
6.3.1  
6.3.2  
6.3.3  
6.3.4  
6.3.5  
6.3.6  
6.3.7  
6.3.8  
6.3.9  
6.4  
General screen description.................................................................................. 93  
Window description ............................................................................................. 94  
Icon description (vertical softkeys)....................................................................... 95  
Editing window......................................................................................................... 97  
Program editing ................................................................................................... 99  
Import DXF files................................................................................................. 100  
Syntax errors when editing................................................................................ 101  
Editing window (softkeys) ...................................................................................... 102  
Open program.................................................................................................... 102  
File..................................................................................................................... 103  
Undo.................................................................................................................. 104  
Operations with blocks....................................................................................... 105  
Find/replace....................................................................................................... 106  
Customizing....................................................................................................... 107  
Profile editor ...................................................................................................... 109  
Canned cycles................................................................................................... 110  
TEACH-IN ON / TEACH-IN OFF ....................................................................... 111  
Graphics window ................................................................................................... 112  
Program simulation............................................................................................ 114  
Simulation errors................................................................................................ 116  
Graphic window (softkeys)..................................................................................... 117  
Type of graphics................................................................................................. 117  
Zoom ................................................................................................................. 118  
Dimensions........................................................................................................ 120  
Point of view....................................................................................................... 121  
Measurement..................................................................................................... 122  
Clear screen ...................................................................................................... 122  
Colors ................................................................................................................ 123  
Options .............................................................................................................. 124  
Speed ................................................................................................................ 125  
Program window.................................................................................................... 126  
Program window (softkeys) ................................................................................... 128  
First block .......................................................................................................... 128  
Stop condition.................................................................................................... 129  
Find text............................................................................................................. 131  
Go to line ........................................................................................................... 131  
Statistics window ................................................................................................... 132  
Time estimates .................................................................................................. 133  
Profile editor .......................................................................................................... 134  
Operating procedure.......................................................................................... 136  
Data editing ....................................................................................................... 137  
Profile definition................................................................................................. 138  
Circular profile definition.................................................................................... 139  
Rectangular profile definition............................................................................. 140  
Defining any profile............................................................................................ 141  
Modify a profile and insert corners .................................................................... 143  
Display area....................................................................................................... 145  
Work plane definition ......................................................................................... 146  
End .................................................................................................................... 147  
Profile editor. Example 1.................................................................................... 148  
Profile editor. Example 2.................................................................................... 149  
Profile editor. Example 3.................................................................................... 150  
6.4.1  
6.4.2  
6.5  
6.5.1  
6.5.2  
6.5.3  
6.5.4  
6.5.5  
6.5.6  
6.5.7  
6.5.8  
6.5.9  
6.6  
6.7  
6.7.1  
6.7.2  
6.7.3  
6.7.4  
6.8  
6.8.1  
6.9  
6.9.1  
6.9.2  
6.9.3  
6.9.4  
6.9.5  
6.9.6  
6.9.7  
6.9.8  
6.9.9  
6.9.10  
6.9.11  
6.9.12  
6.9.13  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
CHAPTER 7  
MDI MODE  
7.1  
7.1.1  
7.2  
7.2.1  
7.3  
7.3.1  
7.3.2  
Appearance of the MDI mode................................................................................ 152  
Window description............................................................................................ 153  
Standard MDI window ........................................................................................... 154  
Block editing and execution ............................................................................... 155  
Full MDI screen ..................................................................................................... 156  
Block execution.................................................................................................. 158  
Save the blocks as a program............................................................................ 159  
CHAPTER 8  
USER TABLES  
8.1  
Appearance of the table mode............................................................................... 162  
8.1.1  
8.2  
8.3  
8.4  
8.5  
8.5.1  
8.5.2  
8.5.3  
Icon description (vertical softkeys)..................................................................... 163  
Zero offset tables................................................................................................... 165  
Fixture table........................................................................................................... 166  
Arithmetic parameter tables................................................................................... 167  
Operations with tables ........................................................................................... 168  
Data editing........................................................................................................ 168  
Save and recall tables........................................................................................ 169  
Find text ............................................................................................................. 170  
CHAPTER 9  
TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE  
9.1  
Showing tables and common operations............................................................... 172  
Table selection ................................................................................................... 172  
Search for a text in the tables ............................................................................ 173  
Save and load the tables ................................................................................... 174  
Printing the tables .............................................................................................. 176  
Tool table ............................................................................................................... 177  
Description of the icons of the vertical softkey menu......................................... 178  
The tool list ........................................................................................................ 180  
Description of the tool data................................................................................ 181  
Operations with the tool table ................................................................................ 189  
Editing the tool table .......................................................................................... 189  
Active-tools table ................................................................................................... 190  
Changing the tool of the spindle ........................................................................ 191  
Table for the status of the tool change process ..................................................... 192  
Magazine table ...................................................................................................... 193  
Description of the icons of the vertical softkey menu......................................... 194  
List of magazine positions ................................................................................. 196  
Magazine information ........................................................................................ 197  
Operations with the magazine table ...................................................................... 199  
Loading / unloading tools to / from the magazine.............................................. 199  
Load / unload a tool to / from the tool changer arm........................................... 201  
9.1.1  
9.1.2  
9.1.3  
9.1.4  
9.2  
9.2.1  
9.2.2  
9.2.3  
9.3  
9.3.1  
9.4  
9.4.1  
9.5  
9.6  
9.6.1  
9.6.2  
9.6.3  
9.7  
9.7.1  
9.7.2  
CHAPTER 10  
UTILITIES MODE  
10.1  
Appearance of the utilities mode ........................................................................... 204  
10.1.1  
10.1.2  
10.1.3  
10.2  
10.2.1  
10.2.2  
10.2.3  
10.2.4  
10.2.5  
10.2.6  
10.2.7  
10.2.8  
Screen description............................................................................................. 205  
Window description............................................................................................ 206  
Vertical softkey menu (icons)............................................................................. 208  
Utilities (Softkeys).................................................................................................. 210  
Sorted by ........................................................................................................... 210  
Options .............................................................................................................. 210  
Search in files .................................................................................................... 211  
Select all ............................................................................................................ 212  
Invert selection................................................................................................... 212  
New folder.......................................................................................................... 212  
Protection passwords......................................................................................... 213  
Data safety backup. Backup - Restore............................................................... 215  
CNC 8070  
CHAPTER 11  
PLC  
11.1  
Appearance of the PLC mode ............................................................................... 218  
Screen description............................................................................................. 219  
Icon description (vertical softkeys)..................................................................... 220  
"Programs" service................................................................................................ 221  
PLC project (softkeys)........................................................................................ 222  
Files of the PLC project PLC (Softkey) .............................................................. 223  
Program editing ..................................................................................................... 224  
11.1.1  
11.1.2  
11.2  
11.2.1  
11.2.2  
11.3  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
11.4  
Program editing (softkeys)..................................................................................... 225  
Analyze.............................................................................................................. 225  
File..................................................................................................................... 225  
Undo.................................................................................................................. 226  
Operations with blocks....................................................................................... 226  
Find/Replace ..................................................................................................... 227  
Customizing....................................................................................................... 228  
Program monitoring............................................................................................... 229  
Program monitoring (softkeys) .............................................................................. 230  
"Commands" service ............................................................................................. 231  
Options of the "Commands" service (softkeys) ................................................. 231  
"Outputs" service................................................................................................... 232  
Options of the "Outputs" service........................................................................ 233  
"Logic analyzer" service ........................................................................................ 234  
Editing logic analyzer data................................................................................. 235  
Save, load and reset the analyzer configuration................................................ 237  
Execute and analyze trace ................................................................................ 238  
Customize the appearance of the logic analyzer............................................... 239  
11.4.1  
11.4.2  
11.4.3  
11.4.4  
11.4.5  
11.4.6  
11.5  
11.6  
11.7  
11.7.1  
11.8  
11.8.1  
11.9  
11.9.1  
11.9.2  
11.9.3  
11.9.4  
11.10 "Monitoring" service............................................................................................... 240  
11.10.1 Description of resource tables ........................................................................... 241  
11.10.2 Definition of the table resources ........................................................................ 242  
11.10.3 Options of the "Monitoring" service (softkeys)................................................... 243  
11.11 "Cross references" service .................................................................................... 244  
11.11.1 Options of the "Cross reference" service (softkeys) .......................................... 245  
11.12 "Statistics" service ................................................................................................. 246  
11.12.1 Options of the "Statistics" service (softkeys) ..................................................... 247  
11.13 "Messages" service ............................................................................................... 248  
11.13.1 Options of the "Messages" service (softkeys) ................................................... 249  
11.13.2 Editing the message and error table.................................................................. 250  
11.13.3 Displaying PLC messages................................................................................. 251  
11.13.4 Displaying PLC errors........................................................................................ 252  
11.13.5 Save, load and print a message and error table................................................ 253  
CHAPTER 12  
MACHINE PARAMETERS  
12.1  
12.1.1  
12.2  
12.2.1  
12.2.2  
12.3  
12.3.1  
12.3.2  
12.3.3  
Appearance of the machine parameter tables....................................................... 257  
Icon description (vertical softkeys)..................................................................... 258  
Parameter table description................................................................................... 260  
"M" function setting table ................................................................................... 261  
Compensation table........................................................................................... 262  
Operations with tables........................................................................................... 263  
Data editing and validation ................................................................................ 263  
Save and recall tables ....................................................................................... 264  
Find text............................................................................................................. 265  
CHAPTER 13  
SETUP ASSISTANCE  
13.1  
Oscilloscope .......................................................................................................... 269  
13.1.1  
13.1.2  
13.1.3  
13.1.4  
13.2  
Interface description .......................................................................................... 270  
Configuration screen.......................................................................................... 275  
Configure and execute the oscilloscope function .............................................. 276  
Machine parameter editing................................................................................ 277  
The Bode diagram ................................................................................................. 280  
Interface description .......................................................................................... 281  
The circularity (roundness) test ............................................................................. 285  
Interface description .......................................................................................... 286  
Configuring and executing the circularity (roundness) test................................ 289  
Configure the graphic environment.................................................................... 290  
Define and execute the movement subroutine .................................................. 291  
Data capture for the graphic .............................................................................. 292  
Adjustment of the machine parameters involved............................................... 293  
Validate the changes and save the configuration used...................................... 295  
Machine parameters that may be modified........................................................ 296  
13.2.1  
13.3  
13.3.1  
13.3.2  
13.3.3  
13.3.4  
13.3.5  
13.3.6  
13.3.7  
13.3.8  
CNC 8070  
CHAPTER 14  
DDSSETUP  
14.1  
Appearance of the DDSSetup mode ..................................................................... 298  
14.1.1  
14.1.2  
14.2  
14.3  
14.4  
Screen description............................................................................................. 299  
Vertical softkey menu (icons)............................................................................. 300  
List of drives .......................................................................................................... 301  
Command bar........................................................................................................ 302  
Changing the drives accessing level ..................................................................... 304  
–Parameters and variables– service. .................................................................... 305  
–Error management– service. ............................................................................... 307  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
14.5  
14.6  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
–Monitoring– service ............................................................................................. 308  
–Information– service ............................................................................................ 309  
Command generator.............................................................................................. 311  
14.7  
14.8  
14.9  
CHAPTER 15  
DIAGNOSIS  
15.1  
Appearance of the diagnosis mode ....................................................................... 314  
15.1.1  
15.1.2  
15.2  
15.2.1  
15.2.2  
15.2.3  
15.3  
Screen description............................................................................................. 315  
Icon description (vertical softkeys)..................................................................... 316  
Configuration diagnosis......................................................................................... 317  
System diagnosis............................................................................................... 317  
Software diagnosis ............................................................................................ 318  
Hardware diagnosis. CAN bus and SERCOS.................................................... 319  
Sercos diagnosis ................................................................................................... 320  
Save the CAN configuration for the start-up test. .................................................. 321  
Generate a report with the system information...................................................... 322  
15.4  
15.5  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABOUT THIS MANUAL  
Title  
Operating Manual.  
Type of documentation  
Description and operation of each table, windows and work modes of  
the CNC.  
Internal code  
Itispartofthe manualdirected to the enduser. Thecode ofthe manual  
depends on the software version –standard– or –advanced–.  
CNC 8070 USER (IN) STAN  
CNC 8070 USER (IN) AVANZ  
Code 03753611  
Code 03753631  
Version  
Start-up  
It corresponds to the software version: (Soft V03.0x).  
Verify that the machine that integrates this CNC meets the  
89/392/CEE Directive.  
Before starting up the CNC, read the instructions of chapter 1 in the  
Installation Manual.  
Warning  
The information described in this manual may be changed due to  
technical modifications.  
FAGOR AUTOMATION, S. Coop. reserves the right to make any  
changes to the contents of this manual without prior notice.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABOUT THE PRODUCT  
Software options  
Bear in mind that some of the features described in this manual  
depend on the software options that are installed.  
“GP” model  
“M” model  
“T” model  
Number of execution channels  
Number of axes  
1 to 4  
4 to 28  
1 to 4  
4 to 28  
1 to 4  
1 to 4  
4 to 28  
Number of spindles  
1 to 4  
1 to 4  
Number of tool magazines  
COCOM version  
1 to 4  
1 to 4  
1 to 4  
Option  
Option  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Option  
Option  
Option  
Option  
Option  
Option  
Sercos digital drive system  
Tool radius compensation  
"C" axis  
Standard  
Option  
Standard  
Standard  
Not available  
Option  
Not available  
Not available  
Option  
RTCP transformation  
High speed machining (HSC).  
Probing canned cycles  
Tandem axes  
Option  
Option  
Option  
Option  
Option  
Synchronism and cams  
Not available  
Option  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
III  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VERSION HISTORY  
Here is a list of the features added in each software version and the manuals that describe them.  
The version history uses the following abreviations:  
INST  
PRG  
OPT  
Installation manual  
Programming manual  
Operation manual  
Software V01.01  
February of 2002  
September 2002  
First version.  
Software V1.11  
Feature  
Probe management through a digital input. It is not possible to manage it through the  
INST  
“Counter” module connector.  
Set the numbering of the digital I/O.  
Kinetics for rotary table.  
INST  
INST  
Possibility to park and unpark SERCOS axes from the PLC.  
Keyboard simulation from the PLC.  
INST  
INST  
New treatment of the JOG panel (Key + Direction).  
New machine parameters.  
INST / OPT  
INST  
• Probe setting.  
• Numbering of the digital I/Os.  
• Kinetics for rotary table.  
• Repositioning feedrate after a tool inspection.  
New variables.  
INST  
PRG  
• Probe setting.  
• Numbering of the digital I/Os.  
• Key simulation.  
• Repositioning feedrate after a tool inspection.  
• General scaling factor.  
• Kinetics dimensions.  
General scaling factor (#SCALE).  
Pobring canned cycles (#PROBE).  
Probe selection (#SELECT PROBE).  
Programming of warnings (#WARNING).  
Block repetition ($RPT).  
Improved programming of high speed machining (#HSC).  
Improved programming of axis swapping (#SET AX, #CALL AX, #FREE AX, #RENAME).  
Macros: The number of macros in a program is now limited to 50.  
Improved tool table.  
Protection passwords.  
Jog mode. Tool calibration with or without probe.  
Jog mode. Automatic loading of zero offsets table.  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
OPT  
OPT  
OPT  
OPT  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
V
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature  
Jog mode. Programming of feedrate “F” and spindle speed “S”.  
Axis selection/deselection for handwheel jog.  
Theoretical path simulation.  
Definition of the first block of a block search.  
Confirm that the CNC is not in automatic mode when executing a program.  
Syntax check in MDI.  
OPT  
OPT  
OPT  
OPT  
OPT  
OPT  
Software V2.01  
January 2005  
Feature  
Operation under Windows XP  
INST  
OPT  
INST  
INST  
Emergency shutdown with battery (Central unit PC104)  
New languages (Basque and Portuguese)  
Multi-channel system, up to 4 channels.  
• Spindle swapping  
PRG  
OPT  
• Axis swapping  
• Communication and synchronization between channels.  
• Common arithmetic parameters.  
• Access to variables per channel.  
Multi-spindle system, up to 4 spindles  
Tool management with up to 4 magazines.  
Tandem axis.  
PRG / INST  
INST  
INST  
New kinematics table-spindle (TYPE13 to TYPE16).  
New kinematics for C axis (TYPE 41 to TYPE 43)  
Parameter matching between the CNC and the Sercos drive  
New machine parameters.  
INST  
INST  
INST  
INST  
• Warning level on Gantry axes (WARNCOUPE)  
• Placing the vertical softkeys on the right or on the left (VMENU).  
• Apply cross compensation to either theoretical or real coordinates (TYPCROSS).  
• Apply leadscrew compensation to eithertheoreticalorrealcoordinates (TYPLSCRW).  
• Defining the default compensation mode (IRCOMP).  
• Defining the type of reference pulse (REFPULSE).  
• Memory sharing between applications (PLCDATASIZE).  
• Generic OEM machine parameters (MTBPAR).  
• Reading Sercos variables from the CNC (DRIVEVAR).  
• Backlash peak compensation (BAKANOUT, BAKTIME, ACTBAKAN).  
The behavior of rotary axes has been changed. Machine parameters AXISMODE,  
UNIDIR, SHORTESTWAY.  
INST  
Possibility of Sercos transmission at 8 Mhz and 16 Mhz. Parameter SERBRATE.  
Define the anticipation time for the axes to be considered to be in position. Machine  
parameter ANTIME and the PLC mark ADVINPOS.  
INST  
INST  
The "(V.).TM.MZWAIT " variable is not necessary in the subroutine associated with M06.  
Filters to eliminate the resonance of the spindle when it works as C axis or in rigid tapping.  
PLC. The TMOPERATION may take the values 13 and 14.  
PLC. New mark MMCWDG to detect that the lockup of the operating system.  
PLC. Accessing arithmetic parameters and OEM parameters with CNCRD returns the  
value multiplied by 10000 (reading in float mode).  
INST  
INST  
INST  
INST  
INST  
VIII  
PLC. The CNCEX command and the FREE mark to execute a CNC block.  
New commands at the PLC.  
CNC 8070  
INST  
• New mark to disable the cross compensation tables (DISCROSS).  
• New mark to correct the parallelism on Gantry axes (DIFFCOMP).  
• Definition of external symbols (PDEF).  
New variables.  
INST / PRG  
• Software version.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
• Variables to be set via PLC.  
• Variables for adjusting the position.  
• Fine adjustment variables.  
• Feedback inputs.  
VI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature  
Electronic-cam editor.  
INST  
Optimize the reading and writing of variables from the PLC. Only the following will be INST / PRG  
asynchronous.  
• The tool variables will be read asynchronously when the tool is neither the active one  
nor in the magazine.  
• The tool variables will be written asynchronously whether the tool is the active one or  
not.  
• The variables referred to local arithmetic parameters of the active levels will be read  
and written asynchronously.  
Spindle parking and unparking.  
The RESETIN mark is not necessary to park/unpark axes or spindles from the PLC.  
Sercos control in velocity.  
Behavior of the beginning and end of tool radius compensation when not programming  
a movement.  
INST  
INST  
INST  
PRG  
Changing the type of radius compensation while machining.  
Via program, loading a tool in a specific magazine position.  
Programming of modal subroutines (#MCALL).  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
Executing a block in a channel (#EXBLK).  
Programming the number of repetitions in the block (NR).  
Direct resolution of 2D and 3D pockets without requiring a softkey.  
Simulating a canned cycle of the editor separately.  
New method to jog the axes using the JOG keyboard. Axis keys and independent INST / OPT  
directions.  
Importing DXF files from the program editor or from the profile editor.  
Importing programs of the 8055/8055i CNC from the program editor.  
Use a softkey to select the repositioning of the spindle after tool inspection.  
Backup-restore utility.  
Improved profile editor.  
Assistance in the program editor. Contextual programming assistance.  
OPT  
OPT  
OPT  
OPT  
OPT  
OPT  
• When programming "#", it shows the list of instructions.  
• When programming "$", it shows the list of instructions.  
• When programming "V.", it shows the list of variables.  
Specific password for the machine parameters for kinematics.  
Save the CAN configuration for testing it when starting up the system.  
The diagnosis mode shows detailed information on the Sercos connection (Type and  
version of the drive and motor connected to it).  
OPT  
OPT  
OPT  
It is possible to print all the information on the configuration from any section of the  
diagnosis mode.  
OPT  
It is possible to simulate a cycle separately from the cycle editor.  
Setup assistance.  
OPT  
OPT  
• Oscilloscope.  
• Bode diagram.  
• Circularity (roundness) test.  
Software V2.03  
April 2005  
Feature  
New values of machine parameter SERPOWSE for the "Sercos II" board.  
Independent-axis programming commands.  
Electronic-cams programming commands.  
New signals that may be consulted and changed for the independent interpolator  
(electronic cam and independent axis)  
INST  
INST  
INST  
INST  
CNC 8070  
The simulated axes are ignored regarding the validation code.  
When unifying parameters, G00FEED and MAXVOLT are not sent out to the drive.  
Electronic-cam programming instructions (#CAM ON / #CAM OFF).  
Independent-axis programming instructions (#MOVE ABS / #MOVE ADD / #MOVE INF  
/ #FOLLOW ON / #FOLLOW OFF).  
INST  
PRG  
PRG  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
G112. Change the drive's parameter set.  
DDSSETUP mode  
G31. Temporary polar origin shift to the center of interpolation.  
PRG  
OPT  
PRG  
VII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Software V3.01  
July 2005  
Feature  
Lathe model  
New machine parameters.  
INST  
• CAN bus type selection (CANMODE).  
• permit using the G95 function in jog mode (FPRMAN).  
• Lathe model. Graphics configuration selection (GRAPHTYPECH).  
• Lathe model. Axis configuration selection (GEOCONFIG).  
• Set of parameters for synchronization (SYNCSET)  
• Improved definition of kinematics for the C axis.  
• Magazine-less system.  
Commands CNCRD and CNCWR. The channel number and the indexes may be defined  
in the variables using an integer, a register or a symbol.  
Ground tools for a turret magazine. The TMOPERATION may take the values 3, 4, 9 and  
INST  
INST  
10.  
Incline axis.  
INST / PRG  
PRG  
Improved coordinate transformation (#CS/#ACS).  
• Keep the part zero when deactivating the transformation.  
• Working with 45º spindles. Select between the two choices.  
• Keep the rotation of the plane axes with MODE 6.  
G33. New parameter (Q1) to define the entry angle.  
G63. Tool inspection is possible during rigid tapping.  
G112. G112 is no longer admitted for the spindle.  
Kinetics definition when activating the C axis (#FACE / #CYL).  
Change of criteria when assuming a new master spindle in the channel.  
Selecting the loop for an axis or a spindle (#SERVO ON/OFF)  
Spindle synchronization (#SYNC/#TSYNC/#UNSYNC)  
Canned cycle selection (#MILLCY/#LATHECY)  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
PRG  
New variables:  
INST / PRG  
• Variable to read the accumulated PLC offset.  
• Variable to obtain a linear estimation of the following error.  
• Variables to read the instant value of feed-forward or AC-forward.  
• Variable to know the line number of the file being executed.  
• Variable to know what kind of cycle is active.  
• Variable to know the tool orientation.  
• Variable to know whether the HSC mode is active or not.  
• Variable to know the theoretical feedrate on 3D path.  
• Variable to know the number of the warning being displayed.  
• The variable (V.)G.CNCERR is now per channel.  
Improved tool table.  
OPT  
VIII  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
VIII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
Manufacturer:  
Fagor Automation, S. Coop.  
Barrio de San Andrés 19, C.P. 20500, Mondragón -Guipúzcoa-  
(SPAIN).  
We declare:  
under our responsibility that the product:  
Fagor CNC8070 Numerical Control  
meets the following directives:  
Safety:  
EN 60204-1  
Machine safety. Electrical equipment of the machines.  
Electromagnetic compatibility:  
EN 50081-2  
EN 55011  
Emission.  
Radiated. Class A, Group 1.  
Conducted. Class A, Group 1.  
Current armonics.  
EN 55011  
EN 61000-3-2  
EN 61000-3-3  
Flickers and Voltage fluctuations.  
EN 50082-2  
Immunity.  
EN 61000-4-2  
EN 61000-4-4  
EN 61000-4-5  
EN 61000-4-11  
EN 61000-4-3  
EN 61000-4-6  
Electrostatic discharges.  
Bursts and Fast transients.  
High Voltage conducted pulses (Surges).  
Voltage fluctuations and Outages.  
Radiofrequency radiated electromagnetic fields.  
Conducted disturbance induced by radio frequency fields.  
As instructed by the European Community Directives 73/23/EEC,  
modification 93/68/ECC on Low Voltage and 89/336/CEE on  
Electromagnetic Compatibility.  
CNC 8070  
In Mondragón on February 1st 2002.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
IX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY CONDITIONS  
Read the followingsafety measuresinordertoprevent harming peopleordamage tothis product  
and those products connected to it.  
This unit may only be repaired by authorized personnel at Fagor Automation.  
Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible of any physical damage or defective unit  
resulting from not complying with these basic safety regulations.  
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST PERSONAL DAMAGE  
‡ Interconnection of modules.  
Use the connection cables provided with the unit.  
‡ Use proper cables.  
To prevent risks, use the proper cables for mains, Sercos and Bus Can  
recomended for this unit.  
‡ Avoid electrical overloads.  
In order to avoid electrical discharges and fire hazards, do not apply electrical  
voltage outside the range selected on the rear panel of the Central Unit.  
‡ Ground connection.  
In order to avoid electrical discharges, connect the ground terminals of all the  
modules to the main ground terminal. Before connecting the inputs and outputs  
of this unit, make sure that all the grounding connections are properly made.  
‡ Make sure that it is connected to ground.  
In order to avoid electrical shock, before turning the uniton verifythat the ground  
connection is properly made.  
‡ Do not work in humid environments.  
In order to avoid electrical discharges, always work under 90% of relative  
humidity (non-condensing) and 45ºC (113ºF).  
‡ Do not work in explosive environments.  
In order to avoid risks or damages, do no work in explosive environments.  
CNC 8070  
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST PRODUCT DAMAGE  
‡ Working environment.  
This unit is ready to be used in Industrial Environments complying with the  
directives and regulations effective in the European Community.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any damage suffered or  
caused when installed in other environments (residential or homes).  
‡ Install the unit in the right place.  
XI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
It is recommended, whenever possible, to install the CNC away from coolants,  
chemical product, blows, etc. that could damage it.  
This unit complies with the European directives on electromagnetic  
compatibility. Nevertheless, it is recommended to keep it away from sources of  
electromagnetic disturbance such as:  
• Powerful loads connected to the same AC power line as this equipment.  
• Nearby portable transmitters (Radio-telephones, Ham radio transmitters).  
• Nearby radio/TV transmitters.  
• Nearby arc welding machines.  
• Nearby High Voltage power lines.  
• Etc.  
‡ Enclosures.  
The manufacturer is responsible of assuring that the enclosure involving the  
equipment meets all the currently effective directives of the European  
Community.  
‡ Avoid disturbances coming from the machine tool.  
The machine-tool must have all the interference generating elements (relay  
coils, contactors, motors, etc.) uncoupled.  
‡ Use the proper power supply.  
Use an external regulated 24Vdc power supply for the keyboard and the remote  
modules.  
‡ Grounding of the power supply.  
The zero volt point of the external power supply must be connected to the main  
ground point of the machine.  
‡ Analog inputs and outputs connection.  
It is recommended to connect them using shielded cables and connecting their  
shields (mesh) to the corresponding pin (see chapter 1 in the Installation  
Manual).  
‡ Ambient conditions.  
The working temperature must be between +5ºC and +45ºC (41ºF and 113ºF)  
The storage temperature must be between -25ºC y 70ºC (-13ºF y 158ºF)  
‡ Monitor enclosure.  
Make surethatthe gaps between the Central Unitandeach wall oftheenclosure  
are respected as indicated in chapter 1 of the Installation Manual.  
Use a DC fan to improve enclosure ventilation.  
‡ Main AC power switch.  
XIII  
This switch must be easy to access and at a distance between 0.7 and 1.7 m  
(2.3 and 5.6 ft) off the floor.  
CNC 8070  
PROTECTIONS OF THE UNIT ITSELF  
‡ Remote modules.  
All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers  
between the CNC circuitry and the outside.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
XII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRECAUTIONS DURING REPAIR  
‡ Do not get into the inside of the unit.  
Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may manipulate the inside of  
this unit.  
‡ Do not handle the connectors with the unit connected to AC power.  
Before manipulating the connectors (inputs/outputs, feedback, etc.) make sure  
that the unit is not connected to AC power.  
SAFETY SYMBOLS  
‡ Symbols that may appear on the manual.  
Symbol of danger or prohibition.  
It indicates actions or operations that may hurt people or damage  
products.  
Warning symbol.  
It indicates situations that certain operations could cause and the  
suggested actions to prevent them.  
Obligation symbol.  
It indicates actions and operations that must be carried out.  
Information symbol.  
i
It indicates notes, warnings and advises.  
‡ Symbols that the product may carry.  
Ground protection symbol.  
It indicates that that point must be under voltage.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
XIII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARRANTY TERMS  
All products manufactured or marketed by Fagor Automation has a warranty period of 12 months  
from the day they are shipped out of our warehouses.  
The mentioned warranty covers repair material and labor costs, at Fagor Automation facilities,  
incurred in the repair of the products.  
Within the warranty period, Fagor Automation will repair or replace the products verified as being  
defective.  
Fagor Automation is committed to repairing or replacing their products from the time they launch  
them up to 8 years after they disappear from the product catalog.  
It is entirely up to Fagor Automation to determine whether a repair is to be considered under  
warranty.  
Excluding clauses  
The repair will take place at our facilities; therefore, all shipping expenses as well as travelling  
expenses incurred by technical personnel are NOT under warranty even when the unit is under  
warranty.  
This warranty will be applied so long as the equipment has been installed according to the  
instructions, it has not been mistreated or damaged by accident or negligence and has been  
manipulated by personnel authorized by Fagor Automation.  
If once the service call or repair has been completed, the cause of the failure is not to be blamed  
ON the FAGOR product, the customer must cover all generated expenses according to current  
fees.  
No other implicit or explicit warranty is covered and FAGOR AUTOMATION shall not be held  
responsible, under any circumstances, of the damage which could be originated.  
Service contracts  
Service and Maintenance Contracts are available for the customer within the warranty period  
as well as outside of it.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
XV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MATERIAL RETURNING TERMS  
When sending the Central Unit or the Remote Modules, pack them in its original package and  
packaging material. If the original packaging material is not available, pack it as follows:  
1. Get a cardboard box whose three inside dimensions are at least 15cm (6 inches) larger than  
those of the unit. The cardboard being used to make the box must have a resistance of 170Kg  
(375 lb.).  
2. Attach a label indicating the owner of the unit, person to contact, type of unit and serial  
number. In case of malfunction also indicate symptom and a brief description of the problem.  
3. Wrap the unit in a polyethylene roll or similar material to protect it.  
When sending the Central Unit, protect especially the screen.  
4. Pad the unit inside the cardboard box with poly-utherane foam on all sides.  
5. Seal the cardboard box with packing tape or industrial staples.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
XVII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADDITIONAL REMARKS  
Mount the CNC away from coolants, chemical products, blows, etc. which could damage it.  
Before turning the unit on, verify that the ground connections have been properly made.  
In order to avoid electrical shock at the Central Unit, use the proper power (mains) cable. Use  
3-wire power cables (one for ground connection).  
In case of a malfunction or failure, disconnect it and call the technical service. Do not get into  
the inside of the unit.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
XIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RELATED DOCUMENTATION  
Manuals directed to the machine manufacturer or to the person in  
charge of doing the installation and start-up of the CNC.  
Hardware manual.  
It describes the hardware configuration and the technical data of  
each element.  
Installation Manual.  
It describes how to install and start up the CNC.  
Manuals directed to the end user; that is, to the CNC operator.  
Operating Manual.  
Describes how to operate the CNC.  
Programming Manual.  
It describes how to program the CNC.  
Examples manual.  
It contains programming examples.  
Other manuals, directed to the machine manufacturer and to the end  
user.  
Manual for New Features.  
It is optional. It describes the new features and modifications  
implemented since the version of the installation, operating and  
programming manuals.  
Error solving manual.  
It offers a description of the error messages that may appear on  
the CNC indicating the probable causes that originate them and  
how to solve them.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
XXI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL CONCEPTS  
1
This manual describes how to operate with the CNC using the keyboard, monitor and  
theoperatorpanel. It alsodescribes the various CNC operating modes aswellas how  
to operate with each of them.  
1.1  
CNC configuration. Hardware  
Monitor, keyboard and operator panel  
The CNC assembly comprises the monitor, keyboard and the operator panel.  
• The monitor shows the CNC's status and, in general, the information about the  
whole system.  
• The keyboard is used to communicate with the CNC; the operator may request  
information on commands or change the CNC status using new instructions.  
• The operator panel is used to govern the various elements of the machine,  
including the movement of the axes and the control of the spindle, etc.  
Modules  
Depending on the CNC model, it may be connected in different ways. For example,  
it would be possible to connect devices such as:  
• Floppy disk drive.  
• CD-ROM unit.  
• Printer.  
• PC-compatible keyboard.  
• Mouse with PS-2 connector.  
• Devices with USB interface.  
• Ethernet connection.  
• Etc.  
For further information, see the hardware manual.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Network connection (Ethernet)  
The CNC may be connected to a computer network through specific connectors. The  
CNC must be configured as any node of the network as if it were a regular PC.  
The following actions are possible when having a CNC configured as a node within  
the computer network:  
• Access from any PC to the part-program directory of the CNC.  
• Access from the CNC to any PC, to execute, simulate or edit programs. The  
program to be executed needs not be in the local disk.  
1.  
• Copy programs and tables from the CNC to a PC and vice versa.  
• Edit, modify, delete, rename, etc. the programs stored at the CNC.  
• Perform a telediagnosis of the CNC.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
1.2  
Turning the CNC on and off  
The way the CNC is turned on and off depends on how it has been set by the machine  
manufacturer. However, the most common way to do it is as follows.  
Turning the CNC on  
After powering up the unit, the operating system (Windows 95 or Windows XP) will  
start up first. Then, and depending on how the manufacturer has set it, the CNC8070  
application will either start up automatically or will have to be initiated by clicking on  
the icon shown on the screen.  
1.  
While starting up, it will display the initial standard CNC screen or the initial screen  
created by the machine manufacturer for that purpose. Once the CNC is running, it  
will show the screen for the work mode (automatic or jog) selected by the machine  
manufacturer.  
Turning the CNC off  
To turn the CNC off, press the key combination [ALT]+[F4]. In any case, the CNC must  
not be turned off if there is any program in execution.  
After closing the CNC application and depending on how the manufacturer has set  
it, theunitwillturnoffautomaticallyoritwillberequiredtoselectShutdownthesystem  
option of the Start menu.  
Once the application is closed, the screen will show a message indicating to the  
operator that the unit may then be turned off.  
The unit must be turned off with the on/off switch after having closed the  
application using the key combination mentioned earlier.  
Turning the unit off incorrectly may cause the loss of information about:  
• Active offsets (zero offsets, part offset, etc.).  
• Coordinates.  
• Parts counter.  
• Active axis sets.  
• Information about the next tool.  
If on power-up, it displays the error " 12 - Checksum error in CNC data", it  
means that the CNC has been turned incorrectly (due to a power failure, etc.)  
and consequently that information has been lost:  
When this error message is displayed, home (reference) the axes again and  
activate the offsets (part zero included) and the sets of axes.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
1.2.1 Emergency shutdown with battery  
The central unit PC104 is powered by an external 24Vdc power supply. Optionally,  
an externalbattery maybe connectedto ensurethe detection ofpowersupplyvoltage  
drops and that the unit is turned off properly.  
When a power supply failure occurs (24V voltage drop) and there is a battery  
connected to the central unit, the latter responds as follows:  
• If the supply is interrupted for less than 2 seconds.  
The screens shows the corresponding warning and the system recovers fine.  
CAN errors may occur due to the lack of 24V at the remote modules.  
1.  
• If the supply is interrupted for more than 2 seconds.  
After the 2 seconds, the screen shows the corresponding error and it initiates the  
automatic turn-off sequence. First, it stops the machine if it is in execution. It  
closes the CNC8070 application, then the whole system and finally turns the  
battery off.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
1.3  
Description of the keys  
1.3.1 Keys associated with the information on the screen  
Softkeys  
The softkeys or functions keys may be used to select the different options shown on  
the screen.  
1.  
Horizontal softkeys.  
It selects the options of the horizontal menu.  
Vertical softkeys.  
It selects the options of the vertical icon menu.  
Using the screens  
Screen change.  
Depending on how the OEM has set this key, it will be possible to perform one of  
the following operations.  
• Sequentially access the different screens of the active work mode. In the PLC  
mode, it switches between the various active services.  
• Sequentially access the different channels.  
• The horizontal softkey menu shows the available screens and the vertical menu  
shows the available channels.  
Window change.  
It is used to switch between the different windows of the screen.  
Previous menu.  
On the horizontal softkey menu, it lets you go up from the softkey sub-menu to the  
previous level from where that menu was accessed.  
Help  
Help.  
It accesses the CNC's system help.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
1.3.2 Keyboard layout  
Depending on the utility of the different keys, the CNC keyboard may be considered  
to be laid out as follows.  
Work modes  
To access the different CNC work modes directly.  
Automatic mode.  
1.  
Jog mode.  
MDI mode.  
Editing - simulation mode.  
User tables.  
Zero offsets, fixtures and arithmetic parameters.  
Tool and magazine table.  
Utilities mode.  
Configurable mode.  
Depending on how the OEM has set this key it will be possible to:  
• Access a CNC work mode.  
• Execute an application.  
• Access the operating system.  
• Carry out no function at all.  
Numeric keypad  
It includes the necessary keys to enter numeric data and define the arithmetic  
operations as well as the following special keys:  
Movement arrow keys.  
They move the cursor one position to the left, right, up or down.  
Previous or next page.  
They show the previous or next page when the program (part-program or PLC  
program) has more than one information page.  
CNC 8070  
Home and end keys.  
It moves the cursor the beginning or end of the line.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Alphanumeric keyboard  
It includes the necessary keys to edit programs as well as the following special keys:  
Shift key for capital letters.  
By keeping it pressed and in combination with a another key, it accesses a second  
set of characters for that other key shown at the top of that key. When combined  
with a letter, it writes it in capital letters.  
When combined with arrow keys, it selects the text the cursor slides on.  
Alternate characters.  
1.  
By keeping it pressed in combination with another key, it accesses the third set of  
character of the that key, shown at the bottom right of that key.  
ASCII characters.  
If a number is keyed in while keeping this key pressed, it will write the character  
corresponding to the ASCII code keyed in.  
Capital letters.  
It toggles between uppercase and lowercase letters. It only affects alphabetical  
characters.  
Delete character (back space).  
It deletes the character to left of the cursor.  
Deleted character.  
It deletes the character to the right of the cursor or the selected text.  
Insert or overwrite.  
It toggles between insert and overwrite modes. When inserting, the new text is  
added to the previous one, whereas when overwriting, the new text replaces the  
previous one.  
Tab.  
It moves the cursor to the next field of the active menu.  
Escape key  
It cancels the current operation without assuming the changes.  
Command validation.  
It is used to validate the data of the current operation and the program blocks edited  
in editing - simulation mode.  
Data recall.  
Having the TEACH-IN option active, it enters the axis position value into the block  
being edited.  
When selecting a profile or conversational canned cycle in the part-program, it  
accesses either the profile editor or canned cycle editor accordingly.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
1.3.3 Description of the operator panel  
Depending on the utility of the different elements, the operator panel may be  
considered to be laid out as follows:  
JOG keys  
They are used to jog the axes. There are two types of JOG panels:  
1.  
There are two keys for each axis. One to jog the axis in the positive direction and  
another one to move it in the negative direction.  
Jogging the axis in the positive direction.  
The movement is carried out at the jog feedrate.  
Jogging the axis in the negative direction.  
The movement is carried out at the jog feedrate.  
Rapid jogging of the axis.  
When combined with another JOG key, it moves the axis at rapid jog feedrate.  
Thereis akey for each axis and two keys formoving direction, common toallthe axes.  
Both keys (axis and direction) must be pressed to jog the axis.  
Axis selection.  
Selection of the moving direction.  
Rapid jogging of the axis.  
When combined with another JOG key, it moves the axis at rapid jog feedrate.  
Feed selectors  
The operator panel has two selectors:  
Movement type selector.  
Select the type of jog movement, which may be either by handwheels, incremental  
jog or continuous jog.  
In handwheel mode, it selects the multiplying factor for the handwheel pulses (x1,  
x10 o x100).  
In incremental mode, it selects the incremental value of the axis movements.  
Feedrate override % selector.  
To select the override percentage to be applied to the programmed and jog  
feedrates, between 0% and 200%.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Spindle control  
It is used to govern the spindle. It consists of the following keys.  
Start the spindle clockwise.  
To stop the spindle.  
Start the spindle counterclockwise.  
To vary the spindle speed percentually.  
Spindle orientation.  
1.  
Execution keys  
Cycle start key.  
It executes the program selected in the execution mode regardless of the active  
work mode (except for MDI mode). If the program has been interrupted, it resumes  
its execution.  
If MDI mode is active, it executes the block just edited.  
Cycle stop key.  
It interrupts the execution of the program or the MDI block.  
RESET key.  
It initializes the system setting the initial conditions as defined by machine  
parameters.  
Single-block execution mode.  
It selects the single block execution mode. When this mode is active, the execution  
of the program is interrupted at the end of each block.  
Home search.  
It is used to reference (home) one or several axes at the same time using a  
subroutine.  
External devices  
The functions of these keys are defined by the machine manufacturer and they allow  
controlling the various devices of the machine (coolant, chip remover, etc.).  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
1.4  
Directory structure  
The necessary files for the CNC are located in the directory C:\CNC8070 and its  
relevant subdirectories.  
FAGOR  
Version directory  
This directory contains the software corresponding to the CNC version installed.  
Do not change the contents of this directory. Only authorized personnel from  
Fagor Automation may modify the contents of this directory.  
1.  
Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible of the performance of this  
CNC if the contents of this directory have been changed.  
Software updates are carried out in this directory and they do not affect the contents  
of directories MTB and USERS,  
MTB  
OEM directory  
This is especially directed at machine manufacturers.  
This directory contains the modifications made by the machine manufacturer at the  
CNC like, for example, the PLC program, machine parameters, custom settings, new  
screens, integrating external applications, etc.  
TMP  
Temporary files  
This directory is used by the CNC to save the temporary files generated while  
operating.  
The directory contents are erased every time the CNC is turned on.  
USERS  
UNINST  
User directory  
It is especially directed at users.  
The purpose of this directory is to provide the user with a memory space for storing  
part-programs, profiles, etc. as they are generated.  
Uninstall directory  
This directory contains the necessary files to uninstall the software of the 8070 CNC.  
To uninstall, double-click on the fimain.exe file and follow the instructions displayed  
on the screen.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
1.4.1 MTB (Machine Tool Builder) directory  
This is especially directed at machine manufacturers.  
This directory contains the modifications made by the machine manufacturer at the  
CNC like, for example, the PLC program, machine parameters, custom settings, new  
screens, integrating external applications, etc.  
DATA  
This directory contains:  
• The databases for machine parameters, tables, etc. and the safety backup (in  
ASCII) of those tables.  
1.  
• (*.dat) files related to the machining canned cycles (cycle editor).  
• The copies made for storing data after turning the CNC off (coordinates, zero  
offsets, etc.)  
DRIVE  
MMC  
This directory contains the information regarding the DDSSETUP.  
This directory contains the CNC custom setting made by the machine builder:  
• The directory "...\MMC\CONFIG", the files that may be modified using the screen  
customizing tool (Fguim.exe).  
• In the directory "...\MMC\IMAGES", the machine builder may include all the files  
of the application regarding bitmaps, videos, icons, etc.  
Initially, it will be a copy of the directory "...\FAGOR\MMC".  
PLC  
This directory keeps the information regarding the PLC integrated by the machine  
builder:  
• The directory "...\PLC\LANG" contains the PLC messages and error messages  
in the different languages  
• The directory "...\PLC\PROJECT" contains the files that make up the PLC project  
and the object file.  
• The directory "...\PLC\WATCH" contains the sets saved from monitoring and the  
logic analyzer.  
RELEASE When the machine builder integrates his/her own application into the CNC, the  
components that have been created (*.OCX files) will have to be located in this  
directory.  
SUB  
When the machine builder integrates his/her own subroutines (tool change, home  
search, etc.), they will have to located in this directory.  
TUNING  
This directory stores the configurations saved by the user in the setup assistance.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
1.4.2 USERS directory  
It is especially directed at users.  
The purpose of this directory is to provide the user with a memory space for storing  
part-programs, profiles, etc. as they are generated.  
Although the user may store these programs in any directory, they should be saved  
in the directories created for this purpose in order to make it easier and faster to find  
them and make safety backup copies.  
1.  
POCKET  
PRG  
This directory saves the profiles that have been created using the profile editor and  
are related to the pockets of the conversational canned cycles.  
This directory saves the part-programs created by the user who may create new  
subdirectories and store the programs in a more orderly fashion.  
PROFILE This directory saves the profiles that have been created using the profile editor and  
are related to conversational canned cycles.  
REPORTS This directory saves the bmp files generated when printing a graphic image to a file.  
It also saves the reports (prn format) generated in the Diagnosis mode.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC  
2
2.1  
Screen description  
The CNC screens shows the following information:  
A
B
C
D
A. General CNC-status bar.  
It shows the information on the program being executed, the active operating  
mode and the PLC messages. See "Detailed description of the CNC status  
bar" on page 14.  
B. Screen for the active work mode.  
The information shown in this area depends on the active work mode (automatic,  
jog, etc.). The information shown in each work mode is described in the relevant  
chapter.  
C. Vertical softkey menu (icons).  
The menu options change depending on the active work mode. The different  
options are selected using softkeys F8 through F12.  
This menu may be placed either on the left or on the right of the screen.  
D. Horizontal softkey menu.  
The menu options change depending on the active work mode. The different  
options are selected using softkeys F1 through F7.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
2.1.1 Detailed description of the CNC status bar  
The top of the screen shows the following information:  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A. Icon (customizable) identifying the manufacturer.  
B. Icon showing the status of the program of the active channel:  
2.  
The background color will be different depending on the status of the program.  
Programmed stopped.  
Program in execution.  
Background color: Green.  
Program interrupted.  
Background color: Dark green.  
Program in error.  
Background color: Red.  
C. Program selected in the active channel for execution.  
The background color will be different depending on the status of the program.  
D. Number of the block in execution. The bottom icon indicates that the Single-block  
execution mode is active.  
E. Information about the channels.  
Number of channels available and active channel (indicated in blue). Icons show  
which operating mode each channel is in.  
Execution mode.  
Jog mode.  
MDI mode.  
The channel synchronization window may be expanded using the [ALT]+[S] keys.  
The synchronization is carried out using marks in the programs. The window  
shows for each channel whether it is waiting for synchronization marks or not and  
the status of those marks in the channel that originates them.  
An LED of various colors of the window show the status of the synchronization marks  
of each channel. On the left, the channels waiting for the marks and on top the  
channels that originate them.  
White  
Green  
No synchronization mark expected.  
Synchronization mark expected. The mark is set to 1 in the channel  
that originates it.  
CNC 8070  
Red  
Synchronization mark expected. The mark is set to 0 in the channel  
that originates it.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Channel 1 (CH1) is expecting synchronism marks from the rest of the  
channels. The marks of channels 2 and 4 are set to 1. The mark of channel  
3 is set to zero.  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
G
W
R
G
W
G
G
R
W
R
G
W
G
R
Channel 2 is not expecting any synchronism mark.  
W
W
(In the graphic, the white LED's are identified with the letter -W-, the green  
ones with the letter -G- and the red ones with the letter -R-).  
2.  
F. Active work mode (automatic, manual, etc.) selected screen number and total  
number of screens available.  
System clock.  
G. Active CNC message.  
For each channel, it shows the last message activated by the program that is  
running. The window shows the last message of the active channel. If there are  
messages in other channels, it will highlight the "+" sign next to the message  
window. To display the list of active messages, press the key combination  
[CTRL]+[O].  
The list of messages shows, next to each message, the channel where itis active.  
H. PLC messages.  
If the PLC activates two or more messages, the CNC displays the message with  
the highest priority and it will show the "+" sign indicating that there are more  
messages activated by the PLC. To display the list of active messages, press the  
key combination [CTRL]+[M].  
On the message list and next to each message, a symbol will appear to indicate  
whether the message has an additional information file associated with it or not.  
To display a message, selectit with the cursor and press[ENTER]. If the message  
has an additional information file, it will be displayed on the screen.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
2.2  
Operating modes  
2.2.1 How to access to the operating modes  
The CNC operating modes may be accessed from the keyboard or from the task  
window that is displayed with the key combination [CTRL]+[A].  
Each operating mode may consist of several screens or pages. Switching between  
the different screens is done by pressing the access key for that operating mode.  
Every time it is pressed, it displays the next screen. The screen selection is rotary  
in such a way that when pressing this key on the last screen, it shows the first one.  
2.  
Accessing the operating modes from the keyboard  
The following operating modes may be accessed from the keyboard.  
Automatic mode.  
Jog mode.  
MDI mode.  
Editing - simulation mode.  
User tables.  
Tool and magazine table.  
Utilities mode.  
Also, the keyboard has a special key that may be configured by the machine  
manufacturer to access their specific operating modes.  
• Machine parameters.  
• PLC.  
• Diagnosis mode.  
• Setup assistance.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Task window  
All CNC operating modes may be accessed from the task window. Use the [CTRL]  
+ [A] keys to open the task window. Press [ESC] to close the window without making  
a selection.  
The task window looks like this.  
2.  
A
B
C
D
A. Available operating modes  
B. Shows or hides virtual jog panel.  
Same as using the [CTRL]+[J] key combination.  
C. Expands the list of active CNC messages.  
Same as using the [CTRL]+[O] key combination.  
D. Expands the list of active PLC messages.  
Same as using the [CTRL]+[M] key combination.  
Moving around in the task window  
Besides the mouse, the following keys may be used.  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
Moves the cursor over the list of operating modes.  
After selecting an operating mode or one of the lower buttons, press [ENTER] to  
activate it.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
2.2.2 Description of the various operating modes  
Automatic mode  
It is used to execute part-programs in automatic or single-block mode.  
While executing a part-program, any other operating mode may also be accessed  
(except"MANUAL"and "MDI")withoutinterrupting the execution ofthe program. This  
way, a program may be edited while another one is running (background editing). The  
running program cannot be edited.  
2.  
Manual (jog) mode  
It is used to control the machine movements manually using the keys of the operator  
panel, perform a home search, set the part zero, etc.  
Editing - simulation mode  
It is used for editing and simulating part-programs even while running another part-  
program.  
MDI mode  
It is used for editing and executing blocks in ISO code or in high-level language.  
User tables  
It is used for manipulating the CNC tables regarding part-programs (zero offsets,  
fixtures and arithmetic parameters).  
Tool and magazine table  
It is used to edit CNC tables regarding the tools and the tool magazine.  
Utilities mode  
It is used to handle CNC part-programs (copy, delete, rename, etc.).  
A password may also be set to access the various operating modes.  
Likewise, it offers the possibility to do a backup or a restore of the desired part of the  
disk.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
PLC  
It is used to operate with the PLC (edit a program, monitor, change the status of its  
variables, etc.).  
Machine parameter table  
It is used for setting the machine parameters to adapt the CNC to the machine.  
2.  
Tuning mode. Setup assistance  
For faster and easier machine setup.  
This mode offers the axis adjustment guide, the circle test, the oscilloscope and the  
Bode graphs.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
2.3  
Dialog boxes  
The dialog boxes consist of the following elements. All the actions may be carried out  
with the mouse or via keyboard.  
• Selection panels.  
It selects among the different option groups within the same dialog box.  
• Drop list.  
It selects an option from a list. Clicking on the right icon, the list expands.  
2.  
• Selection box.  
It activates an option.  
• Option selection.  
It selects an option from a group. Selecting one cancels the previous one.  
• Color pallet.  
Select a color.  
• Selection buttons.  
They access a group of options or close the dialog box.  
After making the changes, the dialog boxes are closed using one of the buttons  
that let you accept or reject the changes made.  
Using the keyboard  
The data of the dialog boxes are defined via keyboard as follows.  
• Using the [CTRL]+[TAB] combination, it is possible to select different panels of  
the dialog box.  
• The [TAB] key moves the cursor through the elements of the box.  
• The [SPACE] key activates the selection boxes, selects an options and selects  
a color from the color pallet.  
• The [ENTER] key presses the button that is selected.  
• The [ESC] key closes the dialog box without accepting the changes.  
• On the drop lists, the desired option may be selected using the keys on the  
keyboard.  
• The arrow keys [§][¨][©][ª] move the cursor over the color pallet and over the  
options of a list.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
2.4  
Windows for warnings and errors  
When anerroroccurs,theCNCwilldisplayawindowdescribing thecauseoftheerror.  
There are three types of errors. The top of the window shows the category and it will  
have a different color depending on the type of error it shows.  
WARNING  
ERROR  
Green window.  
Red window.  
FATAL ERROR  
Purple window.  
2.  
When several warnings and/or errors occur simultaneously, they are displayed from  
the one with the lowest priority to the one with the highest priority. The top right side  
of the window shows the priority level of the message. A down arrow indicates that  
there are errors with lower priority and an up arrow indicates that there are errors with  
higher priority. The operator can toggle the different active errors using the [©][ª]  
keys.  
WARNING  
It is just that, a warning.  
They do not stop part-program execution and the warning window may be closed by  
pressing [ESC].  
ERROR  
It may be a syntax error in a program, PLC generated errors, etc. They are errors that  
must be corrected.  
They interrupt the execution of the program. Although the window displaying them  
may be closed by pressing [ESC], it does not mean that the error status has been  
taken care of. To do that, press [RESET]. After pressing [RESET] the CNC assumes  
the initial conditions set by the machine manufacturer with the machine parameters.  
While the error window is active, no other action will be possible but removing it (it  
is not possible to change operating modes).  
Refer to the error solving manual for a detailed description of the cause of the error  
and its possible solutions.  
FATAL ERROR  
They are errors that force the operator to turn the CNC off.  
If the error persists, contact the Service Department at Fagor Automation.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
2.5  
File selection window  
The file selection window is common to alloperating modes. This window is displayed  
when, from anoperating mode, theoperatorselectstheoption to open, saveorimport  
a file, open or load a table, etc.  
From this window, it is possible to either select an existing file or create a new one.  
A new file may be created only when it is a valid action. Depending on the operating  
mode it is accessed from, the list will only show the proper files.  
2.  
A
B
C
D
A. Type of file to be selected.  
B. Folders accessible from the CNC, as well as how they are structured. It shows  
allthe elements accessible from the CNC, such as the hard disk, floppy disk drive,  
CD-ROM unit, etc.  
C. Files contained in the selected folder.  
D. Area to define the name of the new files. A file can also be selected when knowing  
its name.  
Move around in the window  
Besides the mouse, the following keys may be used.  
It switches the window focus.  
With the focus on a folder, it closes and opens the submenu of  
folders.  
To move the focus through the elements of the window.  
To move the focus page by page.  
To move the focus to the beginning or end of the list.  
Opens the selected file.  
To cancel the selection and close the program listing.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
To select a file from the list  
To make searching easier, the file list may be sorted according to different criteria.  
See "Sorting the list of files" on page 23.  
A file may be selected from the list:  
1. Select the folder that contains the program.  
2. Select the file from the list or write its name in the bottom window.  
3. Press [ENTER] to accept the selection.  
2.  
Pressing [ESC] cancels the operation at any time and closes the window.  
How to search an element from the list  
An element (folder or file) may be selected from the list by moving the cursor to the  
desired element or using an alphanumeric keyboard. Pressing a key will select the  
firstelementfromthe liststartingwiththatletterornumber. Pressingitagainwillselect  
the second one and so on.  
The filescanalso beselected using the "Find file"softkey. See"File search" onpage  
24.  
Creating a new file  
To create a new file:  
1. Select the destination folder for the file.  
2. Write the file name at the bottom window.  
3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the action.  
Pressing [ESC] cancels the operation at any time and closes the window.  
Sorting the list of files  
The file list may be ordered alphabetically, by size or by date.  
• When using a mouse, select the column header with the pointer. Every time the  
same header is selected, it toggles the sorting criteria from ascending to  
descending and vice versa.  
• From the softkey menu. Every time the same softkey is selected, the CNC toggles  
the sorting criteria from ascending to descending and vice versa.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
File search  
It is used to look for files whose names contain a particular character string. When  
selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be found.  
The programs are searched one by one. It may be searched using either the softkey  
menu or the following keys.  
2.  
To search for the next program (in descending order).  
To search for the previous program (in ascending order).  
To end the search and close the dialog box.  
When defining a search, the softkey menu shows the "Next" and "Previous" options.  
• Search next, it looks for the next program (in descending order).  
• Search previous, it looks for the previous program (in ascending order).  
Depending on how the search is carried out, the focus goes to the last file found,  
whose name also appears at the top of the window. To end the search, press [ESC].  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
2.6  
Calculator  
The calculator may be accessed from any task window or directly using the key  
combination [CTRL]+[K]. Press [ESC] to close the calculator.  
The calculator may be accessed from any operating mode. When accessing from an  
editable element, the result displayed by the calculator may be inserted. An editable  
element is any element that may have a focus or cursor, such as the program editor,  
tables, editable data, etc.  
To insert the result, press the [INS] key. It closes the calculator and inserts the result  
in the position that the cursor had when accessing the calculator.  
2.  
The calculator looks like this  
The calculator looks like this.  
A
B
C
A. Results window. It shows the result of the expression after accepting it with the  
[ENTER] key.  
This value may be recovered with the "Acc" button so it can be used in later  
calculations.  
B. Editing window. It shows the expression being defined. The expression may  
consistofoneorseveraloperationsthatmaybedefineddirectlyfromthekeyboard  
or with the softkey menu options.  
It saves the list of the last operations.  
C. Explorer window. It shows, at all times, the result from evaluating the expression  
being defined. When selecting a portion of the expression at the edit window, it  
will show the result from evaluating that portion.  
The result from evaluating the expression may be:  
OK: ###########  
OK: 1.#INF  
Numeric.  
Infinite.  
Error: <>  
Syntax error.  
Wrong expression.  
Wrong expression  
CNC 8070  
Operations history  
The expressions already accepted become part of the history and may be displayed  
using the relevant keys [©][ª]. After selecting an expression from the window, press  
the [ENTER] key to recover it. The [ESC] key closes the history window.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Softkey menu  
The softkey menu shows all the available operations. The expressions may be edited  
using either the softkey menu or the mouse with the calculator keys.  
Work units  
The result of the operations may be given in various units. Use the following icons  
to change the units. It highlights the units currently selected.  
Hexadecimal ($), decimal (D) or binary (B) units.  
2.  
Units in degrees or radians.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
2.6.1 Defining expressions  
An expression may consist of one or more operations. Each one of them may be  
defined by any valid combination of variables, constants, functions and operations.  
Press [ENTER] To accept the expression entered and calculate the value.  
Quick parenthesis insertion  
2.  
Toplace aportion ofan expressionbetweenparenthesis, selectthe portion andpress  
one of the parenthesis keys "(" or ")".  
If while a portion of the expression is selected, an operation key is pressed, the  
selection will appear between parenthesis and it will be preceded by the operation  
just defined.  
Example: Having the expression "1+1/X+1/(X+1)+1". When selecting the  
"1/(X+1)+1" portion and pressing the "SIN" option, the expression will become  
"1+1/X+Sin(1/(X+1)+1)".  
Variables for the calculator  
Up to 26 variables (from "A" to "Z", except "Ñ",) may be used to store numeric values  
and use them later.  
Assigning a value to a variable: A = 34.234  
Reference to a variable: Sin(A/2)  
A single expression may contain both assignment and reference operations. Use the  
":" character as separator.  
A=34.234:Sin(A/2) is the same as Sin((A=34.234)/2)  
Thevaluesofthe calculatorvariables"A"-"Z"are independentfromthevalues  
of local parameters "A" - "Z" (also called P0 through P25).  
i
Constants  
The following constants are available and they may be accessed from the softkey  
menu.  
PI  
Value of pi (3.14159...)  
MM -> INCHES  
INCHES ->MM  
mm/inch conversion factor.  
inch/mm conversion factor.  
Various operations  
In the following examples, the "x" and "y" values indicate any valid combination of  
constants, variables or expressions.  
CNC 8070  
Binary operations.  
AND  
OR  
Binary AND  
Binary OR  
Exclusive OR  
Inverse  
1001 AND 1010 = 1000  
1001 OR 1010 = 1011  
1001 XOR 1010 = 0011  
NOT 101 = 1···1010  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
XOR  
NOT  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Arithmetic operations.  
x + y  
x - y  
x *y  
Add  
Subtract  
Multiply  
Divide  
x / y  
x % y  
x ^ y  
x!  
Percentage  
Power  
10%50 = 5  
2^3 = 2  
3! = 3  
2
2 = 8  
1 = 6  
Factor  
2
2.  
Trigonometric operations.  
SIN(x)  
Sine  
SIN 30 = 0.5  
COS 60 = 0.5  
TAN 45 = 1  
COS(x)  
TAN(x)  
Cosine  
Tangent  
Arc-sine  
INV SIN(x)  
InvSin 0.5 = 30  
InvCos 0.5 = 60  
InvTan 1 = 45  
INV COS(x) Arc-cosine  
INV TAN(x) Arc-tangent  
Conversion functions.  
MM -> INCHES It converts from millimeters to inches.  
INCHES ->MM It converts from inches to millimeters.  
ABS(x)  
INT(x)  
Absolute value.  
Integer.  
Extended functions  
SQRT x  
LN x  
Square root  
SQRT 16  
LN 100  
Neperian log  
Decimal log.  
"e" function  
LOG x  
e ^ x  
LOG 100  
InvLn 3  
10 ^ x  
Decimal exponent InvLog 50  
INTEGRAL x  
It calculates the N=100:A=1:B=5:Integral(x+2)  
integral  
ZERO x  
Function zero  
N=100:E=1e-10:A=5:Zero(x^2)  
INTEGRAL function  
It returns as result, the integral defined by the function between the limits defined by  
the "A" and "B" variables.  
The precision of the result depends on the "N" variable, that indicates the number of  
intervals used to divide the function in order to calculate the integral. If "N"is less than  
or equal to zero, it will be ignored and the number of intervals will be 100. If "N" is  
greater than 500000, the intervals will be 500000.  
CNC 8070  
ZERO function  
It returns as result, the value that makes the function to be zero. Since there may be  
several values satisfying this condition, the result will depend on the initial value of  
the exploration defined with the "A" variable.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
The precision of the result depends on the "N" variable that indicates the number of  
iterations of the resolution algorithm. If "N" is less than or equal to zero, it will be  
ignored and the number of iterations will be 100. If "N" is greater than 500000, the  
intervals will be 500000.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
The "E" variables define the error allowed so the result of the function with the  
calculated value is smaller than "E". This variable is useful when not knowing what  
value to assign to "N". In that case, it is recommended to assign to "N" a very large  
value and to "E" the error allowed.  
2.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
2.7  
Keyboard shortcuts  
Operations at the interface  
To perform different operations with the CNC.  
[CTRL] + [W] Minimize/Maximize the CNC.  
[CTRL] + [J]  
Show / hide the virtual operator panel.  
2.  
[CTRL] + [M] Show / hide the PLC message list.  
[CTRL] + [O]  
[ALT] + [F4]  
Show / hide the CNC message list.  
Turn the CNC off.  
Work modes  
To select the CNC operating modes.  
[CTRL] + [A]  
To show the task window.  
[CTRL] + [F6] Automatic mode.  
[CTRL] + [F7] Jog mode.  
[CTRL] + [F8] MDI mode.  
[CTRL] + [F9] Editing - simulation mode.  
[CTRL] + [F10] User tables.  
[CTRL] + [F11] Tool and magazine table.  
[CTRL] + [F12] Utilities mode.  
[CTRL] + [K]  
Calculator.  
CNC keys  
Same as pressing the following CNC keys  
[CTRL]+[F1]  
[CTRL]+[F2]  
[CTRL]+[F3]  
[CTRL]+[F5]  
Previous menu.  
Switch window.  
Switch screens.  
[RECALL] key.  
CNC 8070  
Same as pressing the following keys of the operator panel.  
[CTRL]+[S]  
[CTRL]+[P]  
[CTRL]+[R]  
[CTRL]+[B]  
[START] key.  
[STOP] key.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
[RESET] key.  
"Single block" execution key.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Program editor  
Keyboard shortcuts available at the part-program and PLC program editor.  
[CTRL]+[TAB] Toggle between the editor and the error window.  
[CTRL]+[C]  
[CTRL]+[X]  
[CTRL]+[V]  
[CTRL]+[Z]  
[CTRL]+[G]  
[CTRL]+[HOME]  
Copy the selected text onto the clipboard.  
Cut the selected text.  
Paste the selected text.  
2.  
Undo the last change.  
Save the program/Recover the original program.  
Move the cursor to the beginning of the program.  
[CTRL]+[END] Move the program to the end of the program.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
2.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUTOMATIC MODE  
3
Automatic mode selection  
The automatic mode may be selected from any other operating mode by pressing  
its relevant key.  
This work mode may be accessed from any channel and even from several channels  
at the same time. A different program may be executed in each channel.  
From the automatic mode, and even while a program is in execution, it is possible to  
access another work mode except the JOG mode and the MDI mode. If program  
execution has been interrupted (either because it is being executed in "single block"  
mode or because the [STOP] key has been pressed), the CNC cancels the execution  
of the program and goes into jog mode.  
Operations in automatic mode  
The following operations are possible in this work mode:  
• Select and execute a part-program.  
The execution may be carried out in -automatic- mode or in -single block- mode.  
• Set the execution conditions (first and last blocks) before executing the program.  
• Searching a block.  
Recoverthehistoryofaprogram uptoaparticularblockandthenresumeprogram  
execution from that block.  
• Display various data related to axes position.  
(Command, position referred to part zero or to home, following error, etc.).  
• Display a graphic representation of the program being executed.  
• Perform a tool inspection while executing the program.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.1  
Displaying the automatic mode  
When this operating mode is active, it will be indicated at the top right side of the  
general status bar.  
This mode may be displayed with several screens. The current screen and the total  
number of available screens are shown at the upper right hand side of the general  
status bar.  
Switching between the different screens is done by pressing the automatic mode  
accessing key. The screen selection is rotary in such a way that when pressing this  
key on the last screen, it shows the first one of the operating mode.  
3.  
Standard configuration  
The standard configuration of this work mode, described in this manual corresponds  
to the one supplied by Fagor. In some cases, the manual shows a sample screen,  
instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand.  
These screens may be customized by the machine manufacturer changing its  
contents as well as its appearance. They may also remove certain screens or add  
some of their own.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.1.1 Description of the screens  
As mentioned earlier, the automatic mode may consist of one or several of the  
following screens (later sections of this chapter describe each one in further detail).  
Data screen  
They show execution related data: axis position, "M" and "G" function history, active  
tool and tool offset, spindle speed and axis feedrate.  
When this screens shows a window with the program selected for execution, it will  
bepossibletoselectthe executionstartingand endingconditionsaswellastorecover  
the program history up to a particular block.  
3.  
Information on program execution.  
Graphic screen  
It shows a graphic representation of the program during execution. It also allows  
taking measurements on the graphics.  
CNC 8070  
Graphic representation of the execution of the program.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.1.2 Description of the general status bar  
The generalstatus bar shows the following information associated with the automatic  
mode:  
B
C
E
3.  
A
D
A. Program selected in the active channel for execution.  
The background color of the window will be different depending on the program  
status.  
B. Icon showing the status of the program of the active channel:  
The background color will be different depending on the status of the program.  
Program waiting to be executed.  
Background color: White.  
Program in execution.  
Background color: Green.  
Program interrupted.  
Background color: Dark green.  
Program in error.  
Background color: Red.  
C. Number of the block in execution.  
D. Active CNC message.  
For each channel, it shows the last message activated by the program that is  
running. The window shows the last message of the active channel. If there are  
messages in other channels, it will highlight the "+" sign next to the message  
window. To display the list of active messages, press the key combination  
[CTRL]+[O].  
The list ofmessages shows, nextto each message, the channel where it is active.  
E. Iconthatindicatesthatthe "Single-block"execution modeisactive. Thisexecution  
mode is selected from the operator panel.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.1.3 Channel synchronization window  
The channelsynchronizationwindow is availablein allwork modes. This window may  
be expanded using the key combination [ALT]+[S]. The synchronization is carried out  
usingmarksintheprograms. Thewindowshowsforeach channelwhetheritiswaiting  
for synchronization marks or not and the status of those marks in the channel that  
originates them.  
The different color LED's of the window show the status of the synchronization marks  
of each channel. On the left, the channels waiting for the marks and on top the  
channels that originate them.  
3.  
Led  
Meaning  
White  
Green  
No synchronization mark expected.  
Synchronization mark expected. The mark is set to ·1· in the channel  
that originates it.  
Red  
Synchronization mark expected. The mark is set to ·0· in the channel  
that originates it.  
(In the graphic, the white LED's are identified  
with the letter -W-, the green ones with the letter  
-G- and the red ones with the letter -R-).  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
G
W
R
G
W
G
G
R
W
R
G
W
G
R
W
W
The previous graph shows for example:  
• Channel 1 (CH1) is expecting synchronism marks from the rest of the channels.  
The marks of channels 2 and 4 are set to ·1·. The mark of channel 3 is set to ·0·.  
• Channel 2 (CH2) is not expecting any synchronism mark.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.1.4 Icon description (vertical softkeys)  
The icon menu offers all the icons associated with this operating mode regardless  
of the active screen.  
The icons are activated with their associated softkey (F8 to F12).  
List of icons  
3.  
Program selection.  
It selects a program for execution.  
Begin tool inspection.  
(This icon is only available when program execution is interrupted).  
To begin tool inspection in order to check its condition.  
While toolinspection is active, the axes maybe joggedand thespindle maybe started  
or stopped.  
End tool inspection  
(This icon is only available when tool inspection is active).  
It ends tool inspection.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.2  
Data screen  
A typical screen of the automatic mode can show the following information:  
C
D
A
E
3.  
F
G
H
B
I
A. Program window. It shows data on the program selected for execution and lets  
selecting the initial and final execution blocks. It shows the following data.  
• Name of the program or global subroutine, called upon from the program, that  
is being executed.  
• Blocks of the program or subroutine being executed. During execution, the  
cursor shows the block being executed.  
When accessing the automatic mode and after finishing the execution of the  
program, it shows the portion of the main program even if there are local  
subroutines defined in the program.  
• Line of the program where the cursor is.  
B. Informationrelatedto thepositionofthe axes. In thescreenconfigurationsupplied  
by Fagor, the data displayed will be different on each screen. Displaying the  
following information is the most typical.  
• The programmed coordinate, in other words, the target position.  
• The current position of the axes referred to part zero or machine reference  
zero (home) being this position referred to the tip of the tool or to its base.  
• The following error (axis lag).  
C. Active "M" functions.  
D. Active "G" functions and high-level commands.  
E. Tool related information.  
Number of the tool "T" that is currently selected, currently active tool offset "D"  
associated with the tool and next tool "Nextool" to be loaded into the spindle.  
F. Information related to the spindle speed "S".  
"Sreal"  
"Sprog"  
"S%"  
Actual spindle speed.  
Programmed speed.  
Percentage of speed override being applied on to the programmed  
value.  
CNC 8070  
Depending on the active screen, it will also show the spindle position "SPOS" and  
its following error "SFWE".  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
G. Information related to the feedrate "F" of the axes:  
"Freal"  
"Fprog"  
"F%"  
Actual feedrate of the axes.  
Programmed feedrate.  
Percentage of feedrate override being applied on to the  
programmed value.  
H. Execution (cycle) time "CyTime" of the program and number of parts made  
"Partc".  
I. CNC messages.  
3.  
Softkey menus  
When selecting the program screen on the softkey menus, the options associated  
with that window will be displayed.  
The options available in the softkey menu are the following. See "3.3 Data screen  
(softkeys)" on page 41.  
‡ "First block"  
To set the first block of the execution.  
‡ "Stop condition"  
To select the block where the execution of the program or subroutine will be  
interrupted.  
‡ "Block search"  
To recoverthe program history up to a particularblockand resume execution from  
that block on.  
‡ "Find text"  
To find text in a program.  
‡ "Go to line"  
To position the cursor on a particular line of the program.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.3  
Data screen (softkeys)  
3.3.1 First block  
It sets the block currently selected with the cursor as the first block to begin execution.  
When not setting the starting block, the program will begin executing from the first  
block.  
Thelastblockmaybeselectedusingthecursororthe"Findtext"or"Gotoline"options  
of the softkey menu.  
3.  
Keys to move the cursor  
Moves the cursor line by line.  
To move the cursor page by page.  
Moves the cursor to the first block or to the end of the program.  
The first block being set remains active until it is canceled (using the [ESC] key) or  
until the program is executed; in that case the first block of the program will be  
assumed as the first block.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.3.2 Stop condition  
To set the block where the execution of the program or subroutine will be interrupted.  
After executing that block, the execution may be resumed with the [START] key or  
canceled with the [RESET] key.  
If the last block is not set, the program execution will end executing one of the end-  
of-program functions "M02" or "M30".  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu of the CNC shows the options available  
for selecting the stop condition. To return to the main menu, press the key for the  
previous menu.  
3.  
Subroutine selection  
To select the stop condition in a global subroutine which has been called upon from  
the program. When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of programs available  
for selecting the desired subroutine.  
Keys for selecting a program  
To switch windows.  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To open the selected subroutine.  
To cancel the selection and close the program listing.  
To select a subroutine from the list.  
1. Select the folder containing the subroutine.  
2. Select the program containing the subroutine or write its name in the bottom  
window.  
3. Press [ENTER] to open the program or [ESC] to cancel the selection and close  
the program listing.  
The program window will show the contents of the selected subroutine.  
Last block  
It sets as execution interrupting block the one currently selected with the cursor. If  
the last block is not set, the program execution will end executing one of the end-of-  
program functions "M02" or "M30".  
Thelastblockmaybeselectedusingthe cursororthe"Findtext"or"Gotoline"options  
of the softkey menu.  
Keys to move the cursor  
Moves the cursor line by line.  
To move the cursor page by page.  
Moves the cursor to the first block or to the end of the program.  
The set last block remains active until canceled (with [ESC] key) or until the program  
is executed; in that case, the execution will end in one of functions "M02" or "M30".  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Number of times  
It sets as stop condition, that the block selected as the last block has been executed  
a specific number of times.  
When selecting thisoption, the CNC requests the number of timesthat the block must  
be executed before ending the execution of the program. After entering the number  
of times, press [ENTER] to validate the value or [ESC] to cancel it.  
3.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.3.3 Block search  
With this option, it is possible, in a program or subroutine, to set the last block in order  
to recover the program history and resume program execution from that point on with  
the same conditions as if it were executed from the beginning.  
When recovering the program history, the CNC reads it up to the indicated block  
activating the "G" and "M" functions it reads along the way. Likewise, it sets the  
feedrate and speed conditions in the program and calculates the position where the  
axes should be.  
3.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu of the CNC shows the options available  
for selecting the stop condition. To return to the main menu, press the key for the  
previous menu.  
Subroutine selection  
To select the stop condition in a global subroutine which has been called upon from  
the program.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of programs available for selecting  
the desired subroutine.  
Keys for selecting a program  
To switch windows.  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To open the selected subroutine.  
To cancel the selection and close the program listing.  
To select a subroutine from the list.  
1. Select the folder containing the subroutine.  
2. Select the program containing the subroutine or write its name in the bottom  
window.  
3. Press [ENTER] to open the program or [ESC] to cancel the selection and close  
the program listing.  
The program window will show the contents of the selected subroutine.  
Stop block  
It sets as the last block for program history recovery the one currently selected with  
the cursor. If the program is executed next, it resumes at this block.  
Thelastblockmaybeselectedusingthe cursororthe"Findtext"or"Gotoline"options  
of the softkey menu.  
Keys to move the cursor  
Moves the cursor line by line.  
To move the cursor page by page.  
Moves the cursor to the first block or to the end of the program.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Number of times  
It sets as stop condition, that the block selected as the stop block has been executed  
a specific number of times.  
When selecting thisoption, the CNC requests the number of timesthat the block must  
be executed before ending the history recovery. After entering the number of times,  
press [ENTER] to validate the value or [ESC] to cancel it.  
If a block containing a multiple machining cycle in ISO code (G160, G161, G162,  
G163, G164, G165) or of the cycle editor (L MULTIPLE.CYC) has been selected as  
a stop block, the block search will end just before the beginning of the nth modalcycle  
repeated in the multiple machining.  
3.  
Automatic search  
With this option, it is possible to recover the program history up to the block where  
the execution was interrupted. The CNC remembers the block where it was  
interrupted; therefore, the stop block needs not be set.  
Starting block  
It establishes the block currently selected with the cursor as the first block of the block  
search. If the first block is not defined, the block search starts at the first block of the  
program.  
Thelastblockmaybeselectedusingthecursororthe"Findtext"or"Gotoline"options  
of the softkey menu.  
Keys to move the cursor  
Moves the cursor line by line.  
To move the cursor page by page.  
Moves the cursor to the first block or to the end of the program.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.3.4 Find text  
To find text or a character string throughout the program.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be  
found. It is also possible to select whether the search must start at the beginning of  
the program or at cursor position.  
Find text  
3.  
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
It selects an option from a group.  
To start the search.  
To cancel the search and close the dialog box.  
To start the search, press [ENTER] and the cursor will position on the text found. By  
pressing [ENTER] again, the CNC will look for the next match and so on.  
To end the search, press [ESC]. The cursor will position on the block containing the  
text searched.  
3.3.5 Go to line  
To position the cursor on a particular line of the program.  
When selecting this option, the CNC requests the line number. Key in the desired  
number and press [ENTER], the cursor will then go to that line.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.4  
Graphic screen  
To display a graphic representation of the program that is running and take  
measurements on the graphics.  
Description of the graphics window  
The graphic window shows the following information:  
3.  
B
A
C
D
A. Display area.  
Shows a graphic representation of the tool paths or of the part as the program  
is being executed.  
B. Dialog area.  
Shows the position of the axes and the machining conditions active in the  
execution (feedrate, spindle speed, tool and tool offset).  
When selecting specific options of the softkey menu, it shows the information  
associated with that option which may be defined by the user.  
C. Information area.  
Shows the work plane appearing in the display area and an illustration  
representing the size of the graph and the portion of the graphic area selected  
with the zoom.  
On 3D graphics, the illustration shows the point of view of the graph displayed and  
it may be changed by the operator.  
Keys for selecting the point of view  
Select a new point of view.  
Assumes the new point of view selected.  
Cancels the selected point point of view.  
CNC 8070  
D. CNC messages.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Softkey menus of the graphics window  
When selecting the graphic window, the horizontal softkey menu shows the options  
associated with that window. The setof options offered by this menu may be changed  
using the "+" softkey which offers a new set of options.  
The options available in the softkey menu are the following. See "3.5 Graphic  
screen (softkeys)" on page 49.  
‡ "Type of graphics"  
To select the type of graphics.  
3.  
‡ "ZOOM"  
To enlarge or reduce the whole graph shown or part of it.  
‡ "Dimensions"  
To define the size of the graphic representation.  
‡ "Point of view"  
To change the point of view of the graph and show it from another perspective.  
‡ "Measurement"  
To measure the distance between two points.  
‡ "Clear screen"  
It is used to clear the screen or delete the graphics displayed.  
‡ "Colors"  
To set the appearance of the graphics on display.  
‡ "Options"  
To set the appearance and some options of the graphic window.  
‡ "+Real"  
To display either the real or the theoretical tool path.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.5  
Graphic screen (softkeys)  
3.5.1 Type of graphics  
To select the type of graphics.  
The various types of graphics may be line (3D lines, XY, XZ, YZ and Combined) or  
solid (Sections and 3D solid). Line graphics show the tool path with lines of different  
colors and solid graphics show an image of the part being executed.  
3.  
The type of graphics selected will remain active until another type is selected or the  
graphic display is deactivated or the CNC is turned off. Likewise, when changing the  
type of graphics, the CNC will maintain the graphic conditions (zoom, graphic  
parameters, display area, etc.), defined for the last graphic.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the types of graphics available.  
To return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
"3D lines" Graphics  
It displays a three-dimensional graph of the tool paths.  
"Sections" Graphics  
Itdisplays atop view(XYplane)ofthe partbeingexecuted and itshowsthemachining  
depths in different tones. It also displays the XZ and YZ sections for the areas shown  
by the indicators of the top view.  
These indicators may be moved around using the [©][ª][§][¨] keys, to display the  
different sections of the part. The CNC shows dynamically the new section being  
selected.  
The indicators may be moved at any time even while executing the program.  
"XY" - "XZ" - "YZ" graphics  
It displays the tool paths in the XY, XZ or YZ plane.  
"Combined" graphics  
It divides the display area in four quadrants and displays the tool path corresponding  
to each plane XY, XZ, YZ and to the 3D view.  
"Solid 3D" Graphics  
It shows a 3D view of the part being machined. Starting out with a 3D block which  
is "machined" as the program is executed.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.5.2 Zoom  
To enlarge or reduce the whole graph shown or part of it. This option is not available  
in the "Combined" type of graphics.  
After selecting the zoom option, a zoom frame will appear over the graphics. This  
frame may be enlarged, reduced and moved around over the graphics already  
displayed in order to select a particular portion of it to zoom into or out of.  
Keys for selecting the zoom  
3.  
To move the zoom frame around.  
To change the size of the zoom frame.  
To validate and display the selected zoom area.  
The graphics at the lower right-hand side of the screen shows two figures. The one  
shown with lines only, indicates the dimensions of the display area and the one with  
colored sides indicates the portion selected with the zoom.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available zoom options. To  
return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Zoom "Initial"  
Restores the size of the display are set via program or using the "Dimensions"option.  
Zoom "Automatic"  
The CNC uses the zoom that it considers best according to the movements  
programmed.  
Zoom "Previous"  
It displays up to two zooms defined earlier. After the second one, it shows again the  
one defined last.  
Zoom "Limits"  
Onlyforthe"Sections"type.Inthisgraphics, zoomingisdonebymovingtheindicators  
that appear framing the graphic sections.  
With this option, it is possible to select the axis whose indicator is to be moved.  
The indicator may also be selected with the "+" and "-" keys of the numeric keyboard  
in a rotary fashion (Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, Ymax, Zmin, Zmax).  
Zoom "Edit"  
It is used to manually edit the zoom values. It is edited in the dialog area of the graphic  
window that shows the dimensions of the zoom frame  
Keys for defining the zoom  
To move the cursor through the data.  
CNC 8070  
To validate and display the defined zoom area.  
To cancel the defined zoom.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.5.3 Dimensions  
It is used to define the size of the graphic representation by setting the maximum and  
minimum coordinates of the graphics on each axis.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the options available for setting  
the dimensions. To return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Dimensions "Automatic"  
The CNC sets the dimensions that it considers best according to the movements  
programmed.  
3.  
Dimensions "Edit"  
It is used to manually edit the dimension values. It is edited in the graphic window  
that shows the dimensions of the graphics on each axis.  
Keys for setting the dimensions  
To move the cursor through the data.  
To validate and display the set dimensions.  
To cancel the set dimensions.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.5.4 Point of view  
It is used to select the point of view on 3D graphics.  
The orientation of the graphics may be directly selected at the graphic window by  
orienting the XY plane and the Z axis. The XY plane may be rotated 360º and the  
Z axis 90º. The figure at the lower right-hand side of the screen shows the point of  
view currently selected.  
Keys for selecting the point of view  
3.  
To orient the XY plane.  
To orient the Z axis.  
To validate and display the selected point of view.  
To cancel the selected point point of view.  
Whenselectingthisoption, thesoftkeymenu shows theoptionsavailableforselecting  
the point of view. To return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Point of view "Edit"  
It is used to manually edit the orientation of the axes of the graphics. It is edited in  
the dialog area of the graphic window that shows the current orientation of the axes.  
Keys for defining the point of view  
To move the cursor through the data.  
To validate and display the defined point of view.  
To cancel the defined point of view.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.5.5 Measurement  
Tomeasurethedistancebetweentwopoints. Thisoption isonlyavailableforthetypes  
of graphics "XY", "XZ", "YZ" and "Solid 3D".  
When selecting this option, the section being measured will appear on the graphics  
with two cursors and a dashed line. The cursor currently selected will appear in red.  
Keys to move the cursors  
To move the selected cursor.  
3.  
To select the cursor to be moved.  
The dialog area will show the coordinates of both cursors, the distance between them  
on the straight line and the components of that distance on the axes of the active  
plane. The coordinates of the selected cursor will appear in red.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To return  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Measurement "Point1" & "Point2"  
It is used to select the cursor to be moved (same as using the "+" key).  
Measurement "Edit"  
It is used to manually edit the position of the cursors. It is edited in the dialog area  
of the graphic window that shows the position of both cursors.  
Keys for defining the measurement  
To move the cursor through the data.  
To validate the selected position of the cursors.  
3.5.6 Clear screen  
It is used to clear the screen or delete the graphics displayed.  
If a solid graphic type is selected, the graphic representation will be reset and it will  
return to its initial state without machining.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.5.7 Colors  
It is used to change the colors used in the graphic representation.  
‡ Path colors. When a line graphics is active, the following colors may be defined:  
The color to draw the rapid traverse.  
The color to draw the canned cycles.  
The color to draw the compensated path.  
The color to draw the theoretical path.  
The color to draw the threading.  
3.  
The color to represent the real coordinates. The real coordinate is the actual  
position of the tool which differs from the command coordinate in the amount  
of following error (axis lag).  
The background color of the window.  
‡ Colors for solids. When a solid graphics is active, the following colors may be  
defined:  
The color to draw the outside X.  
The color to draw the inside X.  
The color to draw the outside Y.  
The color to draw the inside Y.  
The color to draw the outside Z.  
The color to draw the inside Z.  
The background color of the window.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To return  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Colors "Apply"  
Itassumes the new colorsand appliesthemtotheblocks drawn next. Ifthenew colors  
are not applied, the graphics are drawn with the old colors.  
Colors "Edit"  
It is used to select the new colors for the graphics. They are selected in the dialog  
area of the graphic window that show the current colors.  
Keys for defining colors  
To move the cursor through the data.  
To open and close the color palettes.  
To move the cursor through the colors of the palette.  
To cancel the selected colors.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.5.8 Options  
It is used to set the appearance and some functions of the graphic window. These  
options may be used at any time, even while executing a program.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To return  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Option "Activate" / "Deactivate"  
It is used to activate or deactivate the graphic representation.  
3.  
When the graphic representation is deactivated and activated, the current graphic is  
erased; but the display conditions are kept active (type of graphics, zoom, graphic  
parameters and display area) that were active before that mode was deactivated.  
Option "Simple" / "Combined"  
It is used to hide or show the dialog and data areas on the right-hand side of the  
graphic window so the drawing occupies the whole graphic window.  
Option "Hide Tool" / "Show Tool"  
It is used to hide or show the tool while executing in "3D solid" graphics.  
Option "Print"  
It is used to print the graphics in a printer connected to the CNC or as a file (BMP  
format) at the CNC. When printing to a file, it is saved in the folder:  
"C:\Cnc8070\Users\Reports\*.bmp"  
When selecting this option, the CNC will show a dialog box requesting the print  
destination (printer or file).  
Print destination  
To select the print destination.  
To print the drawing.  
To cancel the printing.  
After selecting the destination, press [ENTER] to print it or [ESC] to cancel it.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Option "Print setup"  
It is used to set the printing configuration.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box where the following may be  
defined:  
A. The title of the graphics that will appear next to it in the print.  
B. The name of the file where the graphics will be stored when printing out to a file.  
Print configuration  
3.  
A
B
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
To accept the configuration defined.  
To cancel the defined configuration.  
After filling out the data, press [ENTER] to accept them or [ESC] to cancel them.  
3.5.9 Real coordinates  
It is used to draw the real tool path or the theoretical tool path. This option is only  
available in line type graphics.  
When selecting this option (the softkey will appear pressed), the CNC draws the  
actual (real) tool path.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.6  
Program selection and execution  
3.6.1 Program selection  
A different program may be selected and executed in each channel. The program is  
executed in the channel where it is selected from.  
Toselectaprogram, presstheicon"Selectprogram"ofthesoftkeymenuandthe CNC  
will show a list of all the programs available. See "2.5 File selection window" on  
page 22.  
3.  
Once a program has been selected, its name appears on the general status bar. For  
each channel, it shows the name of the program selected in that channel.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.6.2 Program execution  
The name of the program selected in the channel for execution appears on the  
general status bar. See "3.1.2 Description of the general status bar" on page 36.  
If not indicated otherwise, the program execution will begin from the first block of the  
program to the execution of one of the end-of-program functions "M02" or "M30". As  
an option, it is possible to define the first and last blocks of the execution. See  
"3.3 Data screen (softkeys)" on page 41.  
Start executing  
3.  
To start the execution of the program, press [START] on the Operator Panel.  
The program may be executedin –single block– or –automatic– mode; the modemay  
be selected even while executing the program. When –single block– is active, the  
screen will display the relevant symbol on the general status bar.  
If the –single block– mode is active, program execution will be interrupted at the end  
of each block; the [START] key must be pressed again to execute the next block. If  
the –automatic– mode is active, the program will be executed all the way to the end  
or up to the block selected as end of execution.  
Interrupting the execution  
The [STOP] key interrupts the execution of the program. Press [START] again to  
resume execution from where it was interrupted.  
The execution may be interrupted at any time, except when threading. In that case,  
it will be interrupted at the end of the threading operation.  
Stop the execution  
The[RESET]keycancelstheexecutionoftheprogram andresetsthe CNCtoits initial  
conditions.  
The program selected for execution may be executed in any operating mode  
by pressing [START] on the Operator Panel. The CNC will request  
confirmation before starting to execute the program.  
i
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.6.3 Tool inspection  
This option is only available when the running program has been interrupted.  
Activating tool inspection makes the following operations possible:  
• Jogging the axes using the JOG keys of the operator panel or handwheels.  
• Stop and start the spindle using the keys on the operator panel.  
• Access the CNC tables (tools, tool offsets, etc.) and modify their data.  
3.  
Once tool inspection is completed and before resuming the execution of the program,  
the spindle must be started and the axes repositioned to the point where tool  
inspection began. Oncethe axes arerepositioned, press [START] toresume program  
execution.  
Rigid tapping and tool inspection mode  
When interrupting the rigid tapping and accessing the tool inspection mode, it is  
possibletojogtheaxes(onlyinjogmode)thatareinvolvedinthreading.When moving  
the axis, the interpolated spindle will also move; the spindle used to make the thread.  
If rigid tapping involves several axes, when moving one of them, all the other ones  
involved in the thread will also move.  
This allows moving the axis into or out of the thread as often as desired until pressing  
the repositioning softkey. The axes move at the programmed F except when an axis  
or spindle exceeds its maximum feedrate allowed (parameter MAXMANFEED), in  
which case, the feedrate will be limited to that value.  
The spindle jogging keys are disabled during tool inspection. It is only possible to get  
out of the thread by jogging one of the axes involved in rigid tapping. Functions M3,  
M4, M5 and M9 cannot be programmed at the spindle; they are ignored.  
While repositioning, when selectingoneoftheaxes ofthethread on thesoftkeymenu,  
it will move all the axes and spindle involved in the thread.  
Reposition the axes and the spindle  
To end tool inspection and reposition the spindle and the axes at the point where tool  
inspection began, press the relevant icon.  
After pressing this icon, the CNC will show a list of the axes that are out of position.  
If the spindle was stopped during tool inspection, next to the list of axes, it will also  
show the status that the spindle had before the inspection.  
The axes and the spindle may be repositioned simultaneously.  
Reposition the axes.  
The axes may be repositioned one by one or all at the same time. To reposition them,  
select the axes with the relevant softkey and press [START]. The axes reposition at  
the feedrate defined by the OEM.  
The axes maybe repositioned using the JOG keysorhandwheels. On the otherhand,  
repositioning may be interrupted (using the [STOP] key) to select other axes. Once  
one axis has reached its position, it will no longer be available.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Restore the spindle turning direction.  
The spindle turning direction may be restored together with the axes or separately.  
To do this, it shows, next to the axes to be repositioned, the previous status of the  
spindle (M3, M4 orM19). To restore the turning direction, select the softkey and press  
[START].  
3.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.6.4 Block search and program execution  
With block search, it is possible to recover the program history up to a particular block  
in such way that if program execution is resumed at that block, it will do so with the  
same conditions as if it were executed from the beginning.  
There are two types of block search:  
• Automatic  
To recover the program history up to the block where the execution was canceled.  
The CNC remembers the block where interruption was canceled, thus not being  
necessary to set the stop block.  
3.  
• Manual  
To recover the program history up to a particular block set by the operator.  
When recovering the program history, the CNC reads it up to the indicated block  
activating the "G" and "M" functions it reads along the way. Likewise, it sets the  
feedrate and spindle speed conditions of the program and calculates the position  
where the axes should be.  
To recover the program history, proceed as follows:  
1. To do an automatic search, i.e. restore the history up to the point where the  
program was interrupted, press "Automatic Search". The search starting point  
may be chosen by selecting the first block.  
2. For a manual search, set the last point using the stop block, select the subroutine  
(optional) and the number of times (optional). The search starting point may be  
chosen by selecting the first block.  
3. Press [START] to recover the program history.  
The CNC will set the feedrate and speed conditions of the program and will start  
the spindle in the set direction ("M3" or "M4"). It will also activate the "M" and "G"  
functions defined in the program.  
4. Reposition the axes to the position to resume execution.  
5. Press [START] to execute the program.  
Reposition the axes.  
To reposition the axes, press the corresponding icon and the CNC will show the axes  
that are out of position.  
The axes may be repositioned individually or several at the same time in one of the  
following ways:  
• Manually  
Jog the axes with the handwheels or with the JOG keys. The movement is limited  
by the repositioning end point and the corresponding software limit.  
• Automatically  
Select the axes with the relevant softkey and press [START]. Repositioning may  
be interrupted (using the [STOP] key) to select other axes.  
When an axis reaches the repositioning end point, it is no longer available; however,  
this axis may be moved with the handwheel or the JOG keys under the same  
conditions as before. Once all the axes have been repositioned, none of them may  
be moved.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
3.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MANUAL (JOG) MODE  
4
Jog (manual) mode selection  
The manual (JOG) mode may be accessed from any other operating mode, except  
when a program is in execution, by pressing its relevant key.  
In the same channel, the jog mode cannot be accessed while a program is running  
or a block is being executed in MDI. The jog mode may be accessed in the rest of  
the channels.  
If the execution of the program has been interrupted, the CNC will cancel the  
execution of the program and will go into jog mode. A program is interrupted when  
the [STOP] has been pressed or is waiting in single-block mode.  
When accessing the jog mode from the automatic mode, the CNC keeps the  
machining conditions selected in the last mode.  
Operations in this work mode  
The following operations are possible in this work mode:  
• Display various data related to axes position.  
(Position referred to part zero or to home, following error, etc.).  
• Home the axes (Machine reference zero search).  
• Jog the axes using the keys on the operator panel or electronic handwheels.  
• Move an axis to a position by previously selecting the target point.  
• Preset a coordinate.  
• Start and stop the spindle manually using the keys of the operator panel.  
• Change tools.  
• Activate up to 16 external devices using the keys of the upper side of the operator  
panel. The external devices associated with each key must be defined by the  
machine manufacturer.  
• Calibrate a tool in jog mode (withoutprobe), in semi-automatic mode (when using  
a table-top probe) or using the tool calibration cycle (also when using a table-top  
probe).  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.1  
Appearance of the Manual (JOG) mode  
This mode may be displayed with several screens. The current screen and the total  
number of available screens are shown at the upper right hand side of the general  
status bar.  
Switching between the different screens is done by pressing the jog mode accessing  
key. The screen selection is rotary in such a way that when pressing this key on the  
last screen, it shows the first one of the operating mode.  
4.  
Standard configuration  
The standard configuration of this work mode, described in this manual corresponds  
to the one supplied by Fagor. In some cases, the manual shows a sample screen,  
instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand.  
These screens may be customized by the machine manufacturer changing its  
contents as well as its appearance. They may also remove certain screens or add  
some of their own.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.1.1 Description of a typical screen of this work mode  
A typical screen of the jog mode can show the following information:  
B
C
D
4.  
A
E
F
G
H
A. Informationrelatedto thepositionofthe axes. In thescreenconfigurationsupplied  
by Fagor, the data displayed will be different on each screen.  
The most common thing is to show the current position ofthe axes referred to part  
zero in large characters, and the amount of following error (axis lag) in small  
characters.  
Another more detailed option shows the coordinates of the tool tip and those of  
the tool base, being both referred to part zero and machine zero.  
B. Active "M" functions.  
C. Active "G" functions and high-level commands.  
D. Tool related information.  
Tool number "T" currently selected and active tool offset "D" associated with the  
tool.  
E. Information related to the spindle speed "S".  
"Sreal"  
"Sprog"  
"S%"  
Actual spindle speed.  
Programmed speed.  
Percentage of speed override being applied on to the programmed  
value.  
Depending on the active screen, it will also show the spindle position "SPOS" and  
its following error "SFWE".  
F. Information related to the feedrate "F" of the axes:  
"Freal"  
"Fprog"  
"F%"  
Actual feedrate of the axes.  
Programmed feedrate.  
Percentage of feedrate override being applied on to the  
programmed value.  
G. Moving mode selected at the jog selector switch on the operator panel.  
H. Reserved.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.1.2 Vertical softkey menu (icons)  
Display units (millimeters/inches).  
Itis usedtochange theunitsfordisplayingthe position(coordinates)ofthe linearaxes  
and the feedrate data. Toggling these units does not affect the rotary axes which will  
always be displayed in degrees.  
The icon highlights the units currently selected (millimeters or inches).  
4.  
It must be borne in mind that the units can only be changed on the data display. A  
program assumes the units defined with the active function "G70" or "G71", or, when  
not programmed, the units set by the machine manufacturer.  
Load zero offset or fixture offset tables.  
It may be used to save the active zero offset in the zero offset or fixture offset table.  
Tool calibration.  
It accesses the tool calibration screens.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.2  
Operations with the axes  
4.2.1 Home search  
It is the operation used to synchronize the system. This operation must be carried  
out when the CNC loses the position of the origin point (e.g. by turning the machine  
off).  
When "searching home", the axes move to the machine reference point and the CNC  
assumes the coordinate values assigned to that point by the machine manufacturer,  
referred to machine zero. When using distance-coded reference marks or absolute  
feedback, the axes will only move the distance necessary to verify their position.  
4.  
The axes may be homed manually or automatically.  
• Manual homing is done one axis at a time, from the operator panel.  
• Automatic homing is done with a subroutine defined by the machine  
manufacturer.  
Manual home search  
It is done one axis at a time. Home search of an axis is carried out as follows:  
1. Select the axis to be homed using the alphanumeric keyboard. The CNC will  
highlight that axis to indicate that it is selected.  
To select the numbered axes (e.g. "X1"), select any axis and then move the  
selection until positioning on the desired one. The focus moves with the [©][ª]  
keys.  
2. Press the homing key [ZERO]. The CNC will display the "1" symbol in the numeric  
area indicating that a home search will take place.  
3. Press [START]togoaheadwiththehomesearchor[ESC]to cancelthe operation.  
When searching home in this mode, the CNC cancels the zero offset, the  
fixtureoffsetandthe measuring offset. Itassumesthe machine referencezero  
point (home) as the new part zero.  
i
Automatic home search  
This homing method is only available if the machine manufacturer has previously  
defined a homing subroutine.  
Home search using a subroutine is carried out as follows:  
1. Press the homing key [ZERO]. The CNC will display a dialog box requesting  
confirmation to execute the home search.  
CNC 8070  
2. Press [START]togoaheadwiththehomesearchor[ESC]to cancelthe operation.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.2.2 Jogging the axes  
The axes may be jog using the JOG keyboard on the operator panel. Two types of  
movements may be made.  
• Continuous jog, when the axis moves while acting on the keyboard.  
• Incremental jog, when the axis moves a specific distance every time the operator  
acts on the keyboard.  
The type of jog is selected with the jog selector switch on the operator panel.  
4.  
Continuous jog  
Incremental jog  
Handwheels  
JOG keys  
There are two types of jog keyboards depending on the behavior of the keys.  
Type I  
There are two keys for each axis. One to jog the axis in the positive direction and  
another one to move it in the negative direction.  
To move a single axis, press the axis key and the one for its jogging direction.  
Type II  
Thereis akey for each axis and two keys formoving direction, common toallthe axes.  
To jog an axis requires activating both the axis key and the moving direction. There  
are two options, depending on how the jog keyboard has been configured.  
• The axis will move while both keys are pressed, the axis key and the direction key.  
• When pressing the axis key, the key remains active. The axis will move while the  
direction key is kept pressed. To de-select the axis, press [ESC] or [STOP].  
Feedrates  
The movement is carried out at the feedrate defined by the OEM. The feedrate may  
be varied between 0% and 200% using the feedrate override switch on the operator  
panel.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Continuous JOG  
In continuous jog, the axes keep moving while the jog keyboard is acted upon.  
Continuous jog allows moving several axes at the same time.  
Proceed as follows:  
1. Turn the jog selector switch(a) of the operator panel to the continuous jog position  
on the dial.  
2. Jogthedesired axisusingtheJOGpanel(keypad). The axis willmovewhileacting  
4.  
upon the JOG panel.  
If while moving, a second axis is selected, the new one will move at the same time  
and under the same conditions.  
(a)  
If while the axes are moving, the rapid key is pressed, the axes will move at the rapid  
rate set by the machine manufacturer. This feedrate will be applied while that key is  
kept pressed and, when released, the axes will recover their previous feedrate. This  
rapid rate may be varied between 0% and 200% with the feedrate override switch on  
the operator panel.  
Incremental JOG  
In incremental jog, the axis moves a specific distance every time the key is pressed.  
In incremental jog, the axes may be jogged simultaneously.  
Proceed as follows:  
1. Turn the jog selector switch of the operator panel to one of the incremental jog  
positions. Each position will move the axis a fixed distance; the typical values are  
the following.  
Selector position  
Distance  
1
0.001 mm or 0.0001 inches  
0.010 mm or 0.0010 inches.  
0.100 mm or 0.0100 inches.  
1.000 mm or 0.1000 inches.  
10.000 mm or 1.0000 inches.  
10  
100  
1000  
10000  
2. Jog the desired axis using the JOG panel (keypad). Every time the JOG panel  
is acted upon, the axis will move the distance indicated on the dial of the jog  
selector switch.  
If while moving, a second axis is selected, the new one will move at the same time  
and under the same conditions.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.2.3 Jogging the axes with handwheels  
Up to three electronic handwheels may be used to move the axes.  
Depending on configuration, there may be a general handwheel to move any axis or  
an individual handwheel per axis that will only move its associated axis.  
To move the axes with the handwheels, turn the jog selector switch(a) of the operator  
panel to one of the handwheel positions. Every position indicates the multiplying  
factor applied to the handwheel pulses; the typical values are the following.  
4.  
(a)  
Selector position  
Distance  
1
0.100 mm or 0.0100 inches.  
1.000 mm or 0.1000 inches.  
10.000 mm or 1.0000 inches.  
10  
100  
Once the desired resolution has been selected and depending on the type of  
handwheel being used, general or individual, proceed as follows.  
General handwheel  
The general handwheel is not associated with any axis in particular. It may be used  
to move any axis of the machine (if the manufacturer has set it that way).  
Proceed as follows.  
1. Select the axis to be jogged.  
On the JOG keyboard, press one of the keys for the axis to be jogged. If several  
axes are selected simultaneously, they all move at the same time.  
The CNC will highlight them, indicating that they are selected. When selecting an  
axis or quitting the handwheel mode using the movement selector, the previous  
one is automatically deselected.  
2. Once the axis has been selected, the CNC will move it as the handwheelis turned  
depending on the setting of the selector switch and on the turning direction of the  
handwheel.  
The feedrate depends on how fast the handwheel is turned.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Individual handwheel  
The individual handwheel is associated with a particular axis. The CNC moves each  
axis as its relevant handwheel is turned depending on the setting of the selector  
switch and on the turning direction of the handwheel.  
When moving several axes simultaneously using handwheels, all the axes having  
their own handwheel plus another one selected with the general handwheel may be  
involved.  
4.  
When moving several axes at the same time, the feedrate of each axis depends on  
how fast its associated handwheel is turned.  
It may happen that depending on the turning speed and the selector position,  
the CNC be demanded a faster feedrate than the maximum allowed. In that  
case, the CNC will move the axis the indicated distance but at the maximum  
feedrate allowed.  
i
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.2.4 Moving an axis to a particular position (coordinate)  
When moving the axes to a specific position, they must do so one by one following  
these steps:  
1. Select the axis to be homed using the alphanumeric keyboard. The CNC will  
highlight that axis to indicate that it is selected.  
To select the numbered axes (e.g. "X1"), select any axis and then move the  
selection until positioning on the desired one. The focus moves with the [©][ª]  
keys.  
4.  
2. Enter the coordinate of the target point.  
3. Press [START] to execute the movement or [ESC] to cancel the operation.  
Feedrate behavior  
The moving feedrate depends on whether G00 or G01 is active.  
• If G00 is active, the movement is carried out at the rapid rate defined by the  
machine manufacturer.  
• If G01 is active, the movement is carried out at the active feedrate. If no feedrate  
is active, the movement is executed at the feedrate defined by the machine  
manufacturer.  
This feedrate may be varied between 0% and 200% using the feedrate override  
switch(a) on the operator panel. The percentage will be applied on to all the  
movements carried out in G00 and in G01.  
(a)  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.2.5 Coordinate preset  
Coordinates must be preset axis by axis following these steps:  
1. Select the axis to be homed using the alphanumeric keyboard. The CNC will  
highlight that axis to indicate that it is selected.  
To select the numbered axes (e.g. "X1"), select any axis and then move the  
selection until positioning on the desired one. The focus moves with the [©][ª]  
keys.  
2. Key in the desired preset value.  
4.  
3. Press [START] to preset the entered value or [ESC] to cancel the operation.  
The preset may be canceled by homing the axes one by one or by means of function  
"G53".  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.3  
Spindle control  
The spindle may be controlled manually using the following keys of the operator  
panel. The keys always refer to the master spindle of the active channel.  
The spindle speed should be set (in the MDI mode) before selecting the turning  
direction, thus avoiding a sudden start of the spindle when setting an "S" because  
the turning direction was active.  
Starts the spindle clockwise. Same as function M03.  
4.  
Starts the spindle clockwise at the active speed.  
Displays function M03 in the history of the current machining conditions.  
Start the spindle counteclockwise. Same as function M04.  
Starts the spindle counterclockwise at the active speed.  
Displays function M04 in the history of the current machining conditions.  
To stop the spindle. Same as function M05.  
To stop the spindle.  
Displays function M05 in the history of the current machining conditions.  
Spindle speed override.  
It may be used to vary the spindle turning speed, a typical value being a variation  
between 50% and 120%. Every time one of these keys is pressed, the speed varies  
5%.  
These values may be different depending on how the machine manufacturer has  
defined them.  
Spindle orientation. Same as function M19.  
It orients the spindle.  
Displays function M19 in the history of the current machining conditions.  
Customizing the keys  
The machine manufacturer sets the minimum and maximum percentages between  
which the speed may be varied as well as the percentage of variation every time one  
of these keys is pressed.  
They are set using the following machine parameters.  
MINOVR  
MAXOVR  
STEPOVR  
Minimum override.  
Maximum override.  
Override increment (step).  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.4  
Tool selection and tool change  
The tool located in the spindle may be changed in manual mode. Proceed as follows.  
1. Press [T] at the alphanumeric keyboard. The CNC will highlight the current tool  
indicating that it is selected.  
2. Key in the number of the tool to be placed in the spindle.  
3. Press [START] to execute the tool change or [ESC] to cancel the operation.  
4.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.5  
Definition of cutting conditions  
In jog mode, it is possible to set the turning speed "S" and the feedrate "F".  
• The feedrate will correspond to the active feedrate.  
• The speed entered will correspond to the master spindle of the active channel.  
Proceed as follows.  
1. Press the [S] key on the alphanumeric keypad to select a spindle speed or the  
[F] key to select a feedrate. The CNC will highlight the relevant data indicating that  
it is selected.  
4.  
2. Enter the desired spindle speed or feedrate.  
3. Press [START] to assume the entered value or [ESC] to cancel the operation.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.6  
Automatic loading of zero offsets or fixture offset tables  
It may be used to save the active zero offset in the zero offset or fixture offset table.  
This operation is carried out using the "Load table" icon.  
Proceed as follows:  
1. Press the icon for "Load table". The CNC shows the list of available zero offsets  
4.  
and fixture offsets.  
2. Select the zero offset or fixture offset where you wish to save the active offset.  
3. Press [ENTER] to enter the offset in the table.  
The [ESC] key cancels the operation at any time.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
4.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MANUAL (JOG) MODE. TOOL  
CALIBRATION  
5
Tool calibration is available in the jog mode. The softkey to access tool calibration will  
be different depending on the software installed (lathe model or mill model). To quit  
the calibration mode and return to jog mode, press the [ESC] key.  
Icon to access tool calibration in a mill model.  
Icon to access tool calibration in a lathe model.  
The CNC offers in both models the possibility to calibrate lathe tools and milling tools.  
The CNC will show the necessary data and will update the help graphics according  
to the selected tool.  
Types of calibration  
There are several ways to calibrate a tool. Some ways are only available when using  
a table-top probe.  
Only manual calibration is possible when not using a table-top probe. All types of  
calibration are available when using a table-top probe. The different calibration  
methods may be selected from the vertical softkey menu.  
The active kinematics are taken into account and do not prevent tool calibration in  
this mode. Manual or semi-automatic calibration will not be possible if a coordinate  
( #CS or #ACS) transformation is active or when either the RTCP or TLC function is  
active.  
Manual calibration.  
It is done without the table-top probe. A reference part is required to calibrate the tool.  
All the movements are carried out manually.  
Semi-automatic calibration.  
Available when using a table-top probe. It cannot be used to calibrate lathe tools. The  
positioning movements are carried out manually and the CNC executes the probing  
movements.  
CNC 8070  
Automatic calibration.  
Available when using a table-top probe. The CNC executes all the movements using  
the calibration canned cycle #PROBE.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Probe selection  
Two probes may be configured at the CNC. The probe active at the time is used for  
calibration. The active probe may be changed via part-program or MDI using the  
instruction #SELECT PROBE.  
#SELECT PROBE [1]  
Selects the first probe.  
#SELECT PROBE [2]  
Selects the second probe.  
5.  
Geometrical configuration of the axes: "plane" or "trihedron".  
At the lathe model, the geometrical configuration of the axes may be either of the  
"plane" or "trihedron" type depending on the availability of a third main axis, usually  
the ·Y· axis. The different calibration modes adapt to the current configuration  
showing the necessary data for each one of them.  
Geometrical configuration of "trihedron" type  
axes.  
X
It is the typical configuration of a milling machine or of  
a lathe that has a third main axis (·Y· axis).  
Z
There are three axes forming a Cartesian XYZ type  
trihedron like on a milling machine. There may be more  
axes besides those forming the trihedron.  
Y
With this configuration, the planes behave in the same  
way as on a milling machine except that the usual work  
plane will be G18 (if it has been configured like that).  
Geometrical configuration of "plane" type axes.  
X
It is the typical configuration of a lathe.  
There are two axes forming the usual work plane. There  
may be more axes, but they cannot be part of the  
trihedron; there must be auxiliary, rotary, etc.  
With this configuration, the active plane will be formed  
by the first twoaxesdefined in the channel. Ifthe X (first)  
Z
and Z (second) axes have been defined, the work plane  
will be the ZX (Z as abscissa and X as ordinate).  
The work plane is always G18; the plane cannot be  
changed via part-program.  
Configuration of "plane" type axes. The longitudinal axis.  
In this configuration, the secondaxisofthechannelisconsidered aslongitudinalaxis.  
If the X (first) and Z (second) axes have been defined, the work plane will be the ZX  
and Z will be the longitudinal axis. Tool length compensation is applied on this  
longitudinal axis when using milling tools. With lathe tools, tool length compensation  
is applied on all the axes where a tool offset has been defined.  
CNC 8070  
When using milling tools on a lathe, the longitudinal compensation axis may be  
changed by means of the #TOOL AX instruction or the G20 function.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
5.1  
Manual calibration. Calibration without a probe  
In this mode, only the active tool can be calibrated and it may be a milling tool or a  
lathe tool. The CNC will show the necessary data and will update the help graphics  
according to the selected tool.  
5.  
B
A
C
A. Machine data. Position of the axes, tool and active tool offset, real spindle speed  
and real feedrate of the axes.  
B. Area to define the calibration data.  
C. Drawing indicating that tool calibration is allowed. If the drawing is not displayed,  
some of the data is missing.  
Tool calibration  
Since there is no probe, a reference part is required to calibrate the tool. The  
calibration consists in moving the tool manually until it touches the part and then  
validating the calibration on each axis. After validating them, the new values are  
saved in the tool table.  
Selecting a tool  
The tool and the active tool offset may be changed from the calibration mode. After  
defining the new tool or tool offset in the cycle data, press [CYCLE START] and the  
CNC will execute the tool change.  
Bear in mind that pressing the [CYCLE START] key in this calibration mode only  
executes a tool change; it does not execute the calibration nor does it validate it.  
Calibration in a mill model  
On milling tools, the tool length is calibrated and the wear value is set to zero. The  
radius and radius wear may be set manually.  
To calculate the length, it takes into account the coordinate of the longitudinal axis  
of the tool in the active plane (G17, G18, G19, G20), the tool orientation on the  
(#TOOL AX) axis and the coordinate of the reference part. For the calibration, it  
assumes that the coordinate of the reference part refers to the longitudinal axis of  
the tool.  
CNC 8070  
For the lathe tools, it calibrates the tool offsets on each axis. The offset wears are  
set to zero.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Calibration in a lathe model  
For the lathe tools, it calibrates the tool offsets on each axis. When validating the  
calibration in one of the offsets, the wear of that offset is reset to zero.  
There are two options for the milling tools and may be selected with the following  
icons.  
• Tool length calibration.  
This option may be used to update the length value and resets the wear value  
to zero. It also updates the tool table data.  
5.  
• Tool offset calibration.  
This option maybe used to update the value ofthe offsets on each axis. The offset  
wears are set to zero.  
Validating the calibration.  
They are validated from the vertical softkey menu.  
It validates the calibration of a milling tool.  
It validates the calibration of a lathe tool. It shows an icon for each offset.  
When a lathe has a third axis, the calibration on this axis is done using the horizontal  
softkey menu.  
Definition of data  
To define the data, place the focus on the relevant data, key in the desired value and  
press [ENTER].  
For a lathe tool.  
The nomenclature of the axes depends on the geometrical configuration of the  
"plane"or"trihedron"axes. Fora"plane"configuration, thenamesofthe axesassume  
the DIN standard for lathes; the X axis as the abscissa axis and the Y axis as the  
ordinate axis.  
Data  
Meaning  
Zp Xp  
Dimensions of the reference part being used in the calibration.  
These coordinates are referred to the main axes of the tool.  
T
Tool to be calibrated.  
D
Tool offset to be calibrated.  
Tool offsets on each axis.  
Off Y  
Off X  
Lw  
Offset wear on each axis.  
CNC 8070  
Whena lathe has athird axisperpendicularto theworkplane ("trihedron"geometrical  
configuration), the CNC will also show its data and calibration will be possible on that  
axis. The data of the third axis may be hidden or shown using the horizontal softkey  
menu.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
For a milling tool.  
Data  
Meaning  
Coordinate of the reference part being used in the calibration. This  
Zp  
coordinate is referred to the longitudinal axis of the tool.  
T
Tool to be calibrated.  
Tool offset to be calibrated.  
Tool length.  
D
L
Lw  
R
Length wear.  
5.  
Tool radius.  
Rw  
Radius wear.  
Tool calibration steps  
To calibrate the length, follow these steps.  
1. Define the dimensions of the reference part being used in the calibration.  
2. Select the tool and the offset to be calibrated. After the selection, the CNC shows  
the dimensions defined in the tool table for that offset.  
To calibrate a tool, it must be the active tool. When selecting a tool and pressing  
[ENTER], the CNC only shows the data for that tool. Press [CYCLE START] for  
the CNC to make the tool change so it becomes the active tool. See "Selecting  
a tool" on page 81.  
3. Calibrate the tool. Approach the tool manually until touching the part and then  
validate the calibration using the softkey menu.  
After validating the calibration, it updates the values and initializes the wear value  
to zero. Them, the new values are saved in the tool table.  
To calibrate another tool, repeat steps 2 and 3.  
Considerations for the offsets  
It must be borne in mind that the offset of a tool on an axis is the distance between  
the base of the tool and its tip (nose). This means that when calculating the offset  
of a milling tool on an axis that includes the radius dimension, that radius is included  
in the offset. The same is true for the tool length.  
When calibrating the offsets of a milling tool, the length value is deleted but not the  
radius value.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
5.2  
Semi-automatic calibration. Calibration with a probe  
This option is only available when using a tabletop probe installed on the machine.  
In this mode, only milling tools can be calibrated.  
5.  
B
A
A. Machine data. Position of the axes, tool and active tool offset, real spindle speed  
and real feedrate of the axes.  
B. Area to define the calibration data.  
It may be used to calibrate the length or the radius of the tool that is currently in the  
spindle. After the calibration, the wear is reset to zero.  
When changing the tool data, the tool table data is updated after calibration.  
Tool calibration  
The calibration consists in manually approaching the tool to the probe and then  
command the CNC to execute the probing movement. The CNC will move the tool  
on the selected axis until touching the probe. After touching the probe, it concludes  
the calibration on that axis and updates the values.  
Selecting a tool  
The tool and the active tool offset may be changed from the calibration mode. After  
defining the new tool or tool offset in the cycle data, press [CYCLE START] and the  
CNC will execute the tool change.  
Bear in mind that in this calibration mode, the [CYCLE START] key has two functions.  
If a new tool has been selected, it executes the tool change. If the selected tool is the  
active one, pressing [CYCLE START] initiates the calibration.  
Tool calibration  
Inthismode, onlymillingtools can becalibrated. Forthese tools, the lengthandradius  
may be calibrated. After calibrating one of the two dimensions, its wear value is reset  
to zero.  
CNC 8070  
Use the horizontal softkey menu to select the axis and the moving direction for the  
calibration. Once selected and after placing the tool in the spindle, press [CYCLE  
START] to start the calibration. The tool will move in the indicated direction until  
touching the probe and it will then conclude the calibration updating the tool data with  
the measured values.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
Once a movement has been selected, the window will show a help drawing indicating  
the type of calibration to be done, length or radius.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Definition of data  
To define the data, place the focus on the relevant data, key in the desired value and  
press [ENTER].  
Data  
Meaning  
PRBMOVE Maximum probing distance. If the CNC does not receive the probe  
signal before reaching moving this probing distance, it stops the  
axes.  
F
Probing feedrate.  
Tool to be calibrated.  
Tool offset to be calibrated.  
Tool length.  
5.  
T
D
L
Lw  
R
Length wear.  
Tool radius.  
Rw  
Radius wear.  
Tool calibration steps  
To calibrate the tool, follow these steps:  
1. Define the probing distance and feedrate.  
If the feedrate is not defined, the probing movement will be made at the feedrate  
set by the OEM.  
2. Select the tool and the offset to be calibrated. After the selection, the CNC shows  
the dimensions defined in the tool table for that offset.  
To calibrate a tool, it must be the active tool. When selecting a tool and pressing  
[ENTER], the CNC only shows the data for that tool. Press [CYCLE START] for  
the CNC to make the tool change so it becomes the active tool. See "Tool  
calibration" on page 84.  
3. Manually approach the tool to the probe until it is placed on the path that will be  
used for probing.  
To calibrate the radius with a cylindrical probe, the path must coincide with the  
probe's center point; if not, the radius will be calculated wrong.  
4. Calibrate the tool. Select the axis and the probing direction on the softkey menu  
and press [START].  
The probe moves in parallel to the axis and in the selected direction until touching  
the probe. It updates the measured value and resets the wear value to zero. The  
data is stored in the tool table.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
5.3  
Automatic calibration with a probe and a canned cycle  
5.3.1 Mill or lathe model ("trihedron" geometrical configuration)  
This option is only available when using a tabletop probe installed on the machine.  
This mode may be used to calibrate both milling and lather tools. The CNC will show  
the necessary data and will update the help graphics according to the selected tool.  
5.  
B
A
C
A. Machine data is optionally shown. Position of the axes, tool and active tool offset,  
real spindle speed and real feedrate of the axes.  
B. Area to define the calibration data.  
C. Probe position.  
Tool calibration  
The calibration is done using a probing canned cycle. The CNC moves the tool until  
touching the probe and validates the calibration on each axis. The tool may be  
calibrated on both axes of the plane or on the three axes of the trihedron.  
The calibration begins when pressing the [CYCLE START] key. When the CNC  
finishesthecalibrationonthe selected axes, itupdatesthedimensionsandthe wears.  
Them, the new values are saved in the tool table.  
The horizontal softkey menu offers the option to show the machine data such as  
position of the axes, feedrate, etc. This data is shown on the help graphics of the  
window.  
Selecting a tool  
In this calibration mode, the cycle itself changes the tool and the tool offset. There  
is no need to previously place the tool in the spindle.  
Bear in mind that pressing the [CYCLE START] key starts the calibration cycle.  
CNC 8070  
Select another position for the probe  
The calibration uses the probe position defined in the machine parameters.  
Optionally, another position may be defined for the probe which will only be valid for  
the defined calibration. The new position does not affect the values defined in the  
machine parameters.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
The data for defining the new probe position is accessed using the vertical softkey  
menu.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Tool calibration  
There are two options for the milling tools and may be selected with the following  
icons.  
• Calibrate the offsets and resets the wears to zero.  
• Calibrate the length and radius and measure the wears.  
5.  
For the lathe tools, it calibrates the tool offsets on each axis. The offset wears are  
set to zero.  
Definition of data  
To define the data, place the focus on the relevant data, key in the desired value and  
press [ENTER]. To change icons, place the focus on it and press [SPACE].  
To calibrate the length, radius and wears of a milling tool.  
Thedata showndependsonthe calibration optionselectedwiththe horizontalsoftkey  
menu. This menu may be used to select the length and/or radius calibration and  
whether to calculate their wear or not. If the wears are not calculated, they are reset  
to zero after the calibration.  
Data  
T
Meaning  
Tool to be calibrated.  
Tool offset to be calibrated.  
Safety distance.  
D
Ds  
F
Probing feedrate.  
If not defined, the movements are carried out at the default feedrate,  
set by the machine manufacturer.  
N
Number of cutters of the tool.  
If defined with a ·0· value, the CNC knows the location of a cutter and  
itwillonlymake themovementonce. The spindle turning speedmust  
be ·0·.  
Ifdefinedwitha valueotherthan·0·, allcutterswillbe calibrated. The  
CNC makes an initial movement to locate a cutter; then, stops the  
spindle and makes a precise measurement of each cutter. It is  
necessary to define the spindle speed and the Dm distance.  
Dm  
S
Distance the edge of the tool separates from the center of the probe  
to position the next cutter.  
Spindle speed.  
Probe side to be touched.  
Behavior when exceeding the maximum wear permitted; reject the  
tool or change it with another one from the same family.  
CNC 8070  
Lw  
Maximum length wear allowed.  
Maximum radius wear allowed.  
Probe position.  
Rw  
PRB1MAX  
···  
The values defined here are only taken into account during the  
calibration cycle; they do not modify the machine parameter values.  
PRB2MIN  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
To calibrate the offsets of a milling or lathe tool.  
Data  
T
Meaning  
Tool to be calibrated.  
Tool offset to be calibrated.  
Safety distance.  
D
Ds  
F
Probing feedrate.  
If not defined, the movements are carried out at the default feedrate,  
set by the machine manufacturer.  
5.  
PRB1MAX  
···  
Probe position.  
The values defined here are only taken into account during the  
calibration cycle; they do not modify the machine parameter values.  
PRB2MIN  
This icon sets the number of axes to calibrate on.  
Tool calibration steps  
To calibrate the length, follow these steps.  
1. Select the tool and the offset to be calibrated. It is not necessary to insert the tool  
into the spindle; the CNC carries out this operation if necessary.  
2. Define the data defining the calibration. To calibrate a milling tool, use the  
horizontal softkey menu to select the desired operation.  
3. Press the [CYCLE START] key to start the calibration. The CNC calibrates the  
tool making all the necessary movements; there is no need to manually approach  
the tool. If necessary, the CNC makes the tool change.  
4. After the calibration It updates the tool table data.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
5.3.2 Lathe model ("plane" geometrical configuration)  
This option is only available when using a tabletop probe installed on the machine.  
This mode may be used to calibrate both milling and lather tools. The CNC will show  
the necessary data and will update the help graphics according to the selected tool.  
5.  
B
A
C
A. Machine data is optionally shown. Position of the axes, tool and active tool offset,  
real spindle speed and real feedrate of the axes.  
B. Area to define the calibration data.  
C. Probe position.  
Tool calibration  
The calibration is done using a probing canned cycle. The CNC moves the tool until  
touching the probe and validates the calibration on each axis. The tool is calibrated  
on the two axes of the plane.  
The calibration begins when pressing the [CYCLE START] key. When the CNC  
finishesthecalibrationonthe selectedaxes, itupdates thedimensionsandthewears.  
Them, the new values are saved in the tool table.  
The horizontal softkey menu offers the option to show the machine data such as  
position of the axes, feedrate, etc. This data is shown on the help graphics of the  
window.  
Selecting a tool  
In this calibration mode, the cycle itself changes the tool and the tool offset. There  
is no need to previously place the tool in the spindle.  
Bear in mind that pressing the [CYCLE START] key starts the calibration cycle.  
Select another position for the probe  
The calibration uses the probe position defined in the machine parameters.  
Optionally, another position may be defined for the probe which will only be valid for  
the defined calibration. The new position does not affect the values defined in the  
machine parameters.  
CNC 8070  
The data for defining the new probe position is accessed using the vertical softkey  
menu.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
Tool calibration  
For milling and lathe tools, it calibrates the tool offsets on each axis. The offset wears  
are set to zero.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Definition of data  
To define the data, place the focus on the relevant data, key in the desired value and  
press [ENTER]. To change icons, place the focus on it and press [SPACE].  
Data  
T
Meaning  
Tool to be calibrated.  
Tool offset to be calibrated.  
Safety distance.  
D
Ds  
F
5.  
Probing feedrate.  
If not defined, the movements are carried out at the default feedrate,  
set by the machine manufacturer.  
PRB1MAX  
···  
Probe position.  
The values defined here are only taken into account during the  
calibration cycle; they do not modify the machine parameter values.  
PRB2MIN  
Tool calibration steps  
To calibrate the length, follow these steps.  
1. Select the tool and the offset to be calibrated. It is not necessary to insert the tool  
into the spindle; the CNC carries out this operation if necessary.  
2. Define the data defining the calibration.  
3. Press the [CYCLE START] key to start the calibration. The CNC calibrates the  
tool making all the necessary movements; there is no need to manually approach  
the tool. If necessary, the CNC makes the tool change.  
4. After the calibration It updates the tool table data.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING-SIMULATION MODE  
6
Selecting the editing and simulation mode  
The editing-simulation mode may be accessed from any other operating mode, even  
while a program is in execution, by pressing the relevant key.  
This work mode may be accessed from any channel and even from several channels  
at the same time. A different program may be edited and simulated in each channel.  
What can you do in this work mode?  
The following operations are possible in this work mode:  
• Edit, modify or view the contents of a part-program.  
A program may be edited in CNC programming language (ISO or high level) with  
the assistance of a conversational editor for machining cycles and positioning  
assisted by a profile editor or using the TEACH-IN feature.  
• Simulate the execution of a program displaying a graphic representation of the  
program being simulated.  
• Estimate the total program execution time and the machining time for each tool.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.1  
Appearance of the editing - simulation  
When this operating mode is active, it will be indicated at the top right side of the  
general status bar.  
This mode may be displayed with several screens. The current screen and the total  
number of available screens are shown at the upper right hand side of the general  
status bar.  
Switching between the different screens is done by pressing the editing-simulation  
mode accessing key. The screen selection is rotary in such a way that when pressing  
this key on the last screen, it shows the first one of the operating mode.  
6.  
Standard configuration  
The standard configuration of this work mode, described in this manual corresponds  
to the one supplied by Fagor. In some cases, the manual shows a sample screen,  
instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand.  
These screens may be customized by the machine manufacturer changing its  
contents as well as its appearance. They may also remove certain screens or add  
some of their own.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.1.1 General screen description  
On a typical screen for this work mode, the information is laid out as follows.  
6.  
A
B
C
D
A. Windows of the editing-simulation mode.  
It shows the operating windows of the selected screen. Every screen may consist  
of one or more windows. See "6.1.2 Window description" on page 94.  
B. Status of the program selected in this work mode or channel number when using  
them.  
In any case, the background color will be different depending on the status of the  
program being simulated.  
Ready  
Background color: White.  
Background color: Green.  
Background color: Dark green.  
Background color: Red.  
In simulation  
Interrupted  
In error  
C. Program name and location.  
The background color will be different depending on the status of the program.  
D. CNC messages.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.1.2 Window description  
As mentioned earlier, each screen may consist of one or many of the following  
windows (later sections of this chapter describe each one of them in greater detail):  
• Edit window: For editing new programs or modify the existing ones. Editing is  
possible using a profile editor, a conversational canned cycle editor or using the  
TEACH-IN feature.  
• Graphic window: This window shows a graphic representation of the program  
during the simulation. It also allows taking measurements on the graphics.  
• Program window: For selecting the starting and ending conditions of the  
simulation.  
6.  
• Statistics window: For estimating the machining time for each tool and the total  
program execution time.  
When the screen consists of several windows, the softkey menu will show the options  
of the active window. To switch windows and access the desired softkey menu, press  
the relevant key.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.1.3 Icon description (vertical softkeys)  
The icons are activated with their associated softkey (F8 to F12).  
The icon menu always shows all the icons related to this operating mode regardless  
ofwhich window is active. Thegroupofoptions shownon this menu maybeexpanded  
with the softkey associated with the "+" icon that offers a different set of options.  
List of icons  
6.  
START (simulation)  
(This icon will not be available while simulating a program).  
It starts the program simulation or resumes it if it was interrupted.  
During simulation, the graphic window will show the graphic representation of the  
program being simulated.  
STOP (simulation)  
(This icon will only be available when simulating a program).  
It interrupts program simulation.  
Simulation will resume by pressing the START icon.  
RESET (simulation)  
It cancels program simulation.  
If an error occurs during simulation, it eliminates the error status and returns the  
simulation mode to its initial conditions.  
Channel change for the editing and simulation mode  
(This icon will only be available when using channels).  
It serves to change the channel being displayed for editing and simulation. It does  
not affect the active channel at the CNC.  
"Continuous" or "single block" mode  
It selects the "single block" or "continuous" mode; either one may be selected even  
while executing a program.  
When "single block"mode is active(theicon willappearpressed), program simulation  
will be interrupted at the end of each block. When the "automatic" mode is active, the  
simulation will take place until the end of the program or up to the block selected as  
end of simulation.  
CNC 8070  
Check program syntax  
It analyzes the program looking for syntax errors.  
If there are no errors, the bottom of the screen will display a message indicating that  
the program is correct. If there are syntax errors, they will be shown at the bottom  
of the editing window.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Time estimates  
(This icon is only available when the statistics window is displayed).  
It offers an estimate of the total execution time at 100% of the programmed feedrate.  
For this time estimate, the CNC analyzes:  
• The machining and positioning time for each tool used in the program.  
• The number of "M" functions that are executed.  
• The number of tool changes performed.  
6.  
The result will appear at the statistics window.  
Simulation setup  
It shows the simulation setup options.  
• Activate and cancel tool radius compensation.  
• Conditional stop.  
• Activate and deactivate the software travel limits.  
• Block skip condition.  
• Cancel the channel synchronization in the simulation.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.2  
Editing window  
It may be used to edit, modify or see the contents of a part-program and check the  
program for syntax errors.  
Description of the editing window  
The editing window shows the following information:  
6.  
A
B
C
D
A. Title bar  
Name of the program selected for editing. It also indicates whether it is a read-  
only program or not (if read-only, while simulating or executing).  
An "*" next to the program means that the program has been modified since last  
saved (only if automatic program saving is off).  
B. Edit area.  
Program editing area showing its contents.  
C. Editing errors (if any).  
List of errors occurred while editing the program or syntax errors found in the  
syntax check.  
D. Status bar.  
Information about cursor position and the status of the editor options such as:  
AUTONUM: Automatic block numbering. When active, the CNC automatically  
numbers the new blocks being generated.  
CAP:  
OVR:  
NUM:  
Capital letters. When active, the text is always written in capital  
letters.  
Overwrite text. It toggles between overwriting and inserting text.  
When active, it overwrites the existing text.  
Numeric keypad active.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Softkey menu of the editing window  
When selecting the editing window, the horizontal softkey menu shows the options  
for this window. The set of options offered by this menu may be changed using the  
"+" softkey which offers a new set of options.  
The options available in the softkey menu are the following. See "6.3 Editing  
window (softkeys)" on page 102.  
‡ "Open program"  
To select a program for the editing - simulation mode.  
6.  
‡ "File"  
To restore, save, save with another name or print a program. It can also be used  
to import the contents of another program, of a DXF file or PIM and PIT files.  
‡ "Undo"  
To "undo" the last modifications made.  
‡ "Operations with blocks"  
To copy, cut and paste information of a block or set of blocks within the program.  
It can also copy a block or set of blocks as an independent program.  
‡ "Find/replace"  
To search for a line or text in the program being edited. It can also replace a text  
with another text.  
‡ "Customize"  
To customize the appearance and the properties of the editing window.  
‡ "Profile editor"  
To access the profile editor and define a new profile or modify an existing one.  
‡ "Cycle editor"  
To accessthe conversationaleditorfor machiningand positioning canned cycles.  
‡ "TEACH-IN ON / TEACH-IN OFF"  
To turn on or off the TEACH-IN mode.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.2.1 Program editing  
The process of editing or modifying a program is the following:  
1. Open the program at the editor or create a new program.  
2. Use the cursor to select the block where the new blocks will be inserted. Edit the  
program blocks using the editing modes available.  
3. Save the program so it can be modified or executed later on. This operation may  
be performedautomaticallyastheprogram is being editedoriftheeditorhasbeen  
personalized.  
6.  
Available editing modes  
Any of the various editing modes available may be used while editing a program. The  
available editing modes are:  
CNC language  
It is edited block by block and each one may be written in ISO language or in High  
level language.  
Wheneditinghighlevelcommandsanddependingonthetypeofcommand, theeditor  
offers a list of available commands.  
• Keying in "V" shows the list of CNC variables.  
• Keying in "#" shows the list of CNC instructions.  
• Keying in "$" shows the list of flow control instructions of the CNC.  
In all of them, when keying the following letter of the variable or instruction name, the  
cursor of the list goes to the first command that starts with that letter. The [©][ª] keys  
may be used to move the cursor through the list of commands and the [ENTER] key  
to enter the selected command into the block that is being edited.  
Conversational editor for canned cycles  
To define machining and positioning canned cycles quickly and easily. This mode  
offers the following advantages:  
• There is no need to know the canned cycle parameters.  
• The CNC only lets entering the data being shown, thus avoiding any data entry  
errors when defining the cycles.  
• The programmer is assisted at all times with help messages.  
When done editing the cycle, the CNC generates the necessary blocks and it will add  
them to the program inserting them after the block indicated by the cursor.  
Profile editor  
To edit new profiles quickly and easily. The editor shows a graphic representation of  
the profile being defined.  
After defining the profile data, the CNC generates the necessaryblocks and it willadd  
them to the program inserting them after the block indicated by the cursor.  
TEACH-IN  
CNC 8070  
It is basically the same as editing in CNC language, except when it comes to  
programming coordinates. This option displays the coordinates of each axis and lets  
enter them directly into the block indicated by the cursor.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.2.2 Import DXF files  
DXF files may be imported from the editor to the program being edited. See  
"6.3.2 File" on page 103.  
The DXF format is standard for exchanging graphic files. Importing this type of files  
makes it possible to generate the part-program directly from a drawing. The DXF file  
may consist of points, lines and arcs. It can also consist of polylines, but they must  
be previously uncombined.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of the programs that may be  
imported into the one being edited. Select the desired program from the list and press  
[ENTER].  
6.  
Afterselectingthefile,definehow thevariouslayersoftheDXFfilearetobeconverted  
into ISO code. Once this data has been set, press the "Convert" softkey to import the  
file into the part-program.  
DXF file configuration  
When importing a DXF file, it shows the configuration window to define how the  
different layersofthedrawing must be treated. Theconfiguration window shows three  
areas clearly and distinctly.  
Layer description area  
The DXF files may consistof layers and each one has differentheights ofthedrawing.  
All the layers together make up the whole drawing.  
When importing the file, you can decide which layers to include in the part-program.  
By default, all the layers are included. To exclude a layer, select it and press the  
"Disable layer" softkey.  
For each layer, it indicates its priority and offset (height) on the perpendicular axis.  
Layer priority and offset  
It shows the data of the layer selected by the cursor. For each layer, one must define  
its priority and offset (height) on the perpendicular axis.  
• The priority defines the order in which the layers will be executed; i.e. the order  
in which they will be included in the part-program. Those with priority ·1· will be  
executed first and so on.  
• The offset (height) on the perpendicular axis permits executing each layer in the  
desired Z coordinate (or that of the relevant perpendicular axis).  
Work plane  
The work plane must be defined before importing the file in the part-program. The  
plane is defined by selecting the abscissa axis, the ordinate axis and the  
perpendicular axis.  
When importing it in the profile editor, the plane will be the one selected at the editor  
and only the perpendicular axis can be selected.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.2.3 Syntax errors when editing  
The syntax errors occurred while editing or after running a syntax check will be  
displayed at the bottom of editing window.  
To toggle the cursor between the editor and the error listing, press the key  
combination [CTRL]+[TAB].  
6.  
Errors while editing  
While editing, each block is analyzed when entered. If a syntax error is detected in  
the block, the error window will display the following information:  
• Position of the error in the block.  
• Error number and explanatory text.  
Errors after a syntax check  
The syntax check is executed from the icon menu.  
The syntax check checks all the blocks of the program. If a syntax error is detected,  
the error window will show the following information.  
• Location and name of the program being checked.  
• Line number and position of the error within the block.  
• Explanation of the error.  
Moving the cursor through the errors of the window, the editor will highlight the block  
containing the selected error. Press [ENTER] to select the block containing the error  
or press [ESC] to close the error window.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.3  
Editing window (softkeys)  
6.3.1 Open program  
To select a program for the editing - simulation mode. This program may be a new  
one or an existing one. A different program may be edited and executed in each  
channel.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of the available programs. See  
"2.5 File selection window" on page 22.  
6.  
To select a program from the list:  
1. Select the folder that contains the program. If it is a new program, it will be saved  
in this folder.  
2. Select the program from the list or write its name in the bottom window. To edit  
a new program, write the name of the program in the bottom window.  
3. Press [ENTER] to accept the selection and open the program or [ESC] to cancel  
it and close the program listing.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.3.2 File  
It is used to restore, save, import or print a program.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To return  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
File "Restore original"  
This option is only available when the "auto save" option is active. See  
"6.3.6 Customizing" on page 107.  
6.  
It is used to restore the original program without the changes made since the last time  
it was opened. When selecting this option, the CNC requests confirmation of the  
command:  
Keys to move the cursor  
Moves the cursor through the selection buttons.  
Applies the option selected with the cursor.  
File "Save"  
This option is only available when the "Manual save" option is active. See  
"6.3.6 Customizing" on page 107.  
To save the program being edited.  
File "Save as"  
It is used for saving a program that is being edited with a different name. After saving  
the program, one may continue editing the new program  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list with all the programs already saved.  
Keys for selecting a file  
To switch windows.  
To close and open a folder submenu.  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To save the new program.  
To cancel the selection and close the program listing.  
To save a program with another name:  
1. Select the destination folder.  
2. Write the program name in the bottom window. To replace an existing program,  
select it from the list  
3. Press [ENTER] to save the program or [ESC] to return to the editor without saving  
the program.  
Once the program has been saved, the top of the editing window will show the name  
of the new program.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
File "Include program"  
It may be used to import the content of a part-program into the one being edited. Any  
program that may be accessed from the CNC may be imported, even the program  
currently in execution.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of the programs that may be  
imported into the one being edited.  
Keys for selecting a program  
To switch windows.  
6.  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To save the new program.  
To cancel the selection and close the program listing.  
To import a program from the list:  
1. Select the desired program from the list or write its name in the bottom window.  
2. Press [ENTER] to import the program or [ESC] to cancel the selection and close  
the program listing.  
The selected program is added to the one being edited after the block indicated by  
the cursor.  
The program may be selected from the list as follows:  
• By moving the cursor to the desired element.  
i
• Using the alphanumeric keyboard. Pressing a key will select the first  
element from the list starting with that letter or number. Pressing it again  
will select the second one and so on.  
Programs may also be selected using the "File search" option of the softkey  
menu.  
File "Print"  
It is used to print the program that is being edited out to a printer connected to the  
CNC.  
File "Import"  
It permits importing DXF, PIM and PIT files into the program being edited. See  
"6.2.2 Import DXF files" on page 100.  
• The DXF format is standard for exchanging graphic files. Importing this type of  
files makes it possible to generate the part-program directly from a drawing. The  
files must consist of points, lines and arcs.  
• PIM and PIT files are part-programs used by the 8055 CNC. When importing this  
type of file, its programming language is adapted to the one used by the CNC.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of the programs that may be  
imported into the one being edited. Select the desired program from the list and press  
[ENTER].  
CNC 8070  
6.3.3 Undo  
To "undo" the last modifications made. The modifications are undone one by one  
starting from the most recent one.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.3.4 Operations with blocks  
It is used to copy, cut and paste the information of a block or set of blocks and export  
this information as an independent program.  
This option is only available when there is a text selected in the program or on the  
clipboard. To select a text in the program, keep the [SHIFT] key pressed while moving  
the cursor.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To return  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
6.  
Operations with blocks "Copy"  
It copies the selected text onto the clipboard.  
Operations with blocks "Cut"  
Copies the selected text onto the clipboard and deletes it from the program.  
Operations with blocks "Paste"  
Pastes the contents of the clipboard into the program.  
Operations with blocks "Copy to program"  
Saves the selected texts as an independent program.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of the available programs.  
Keys for selecting a program  
To switch windows.  
To close and open a folder submenu.  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To import the selected program.  
To cancel the selection and close the program listing.  
To save the text as a program:  
1. Select the destination folder.  
2. Write the program name in the bottom window. To replace an existing program,  
select it from the list.  
3. Press [ENTER] to save the program or [ESC] to cancel the selection and close  
the program listing.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.3.5 Find/replace  
It is used for searching for a line or a text in a program. It can also replace a text with  
another text.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the line number  
orthe texttolookfor. Whendefiningatextsearch, certainoptionsmayalsobedefining  
that allow:  
A. Replacing the text being searched with another in the program.  
B. Ignore uppercase and lowercase.  
6.  
C. Consider the text to find as a whole word.  
D. Select whether the search starts at the beginning of the program or at the cursor  
position.  
Find/replace  
A
B
C
D
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
To activate/deactivate the selection box (B) (C).  
To select an option of a group (D).  
To start the search.  
To cancel the search and close the dialog box.  
Afterdefiningthe searchoptions, press[ENTER]tostartthesearchor[ESC]tocancel  
it.  
The text found in the program will be highlighted and the softkey menu will show the  
following options:  
• Replace, to replace the highlighted text.  
• Replace all, to replace the text throughout the whole program.  
• Find next, to skip this text and keep on searching.  
To end the search, press [ESC].  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.3.6 Customizing  
To customize the appearance and the properties of the editing window.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To return  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Customizing "Appearance" (looks)  
It is used for personalizing the look of the different elements of the editing window  
and the colors of the elements of the program.  
6.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows the dialog box with two panels. The first  
one has the elements of the editing window that may be customized and the second  
one those of the program. The panel is selected by the key combination  
[CTRL]+[TAB].  
Set aspect  
B
A
C
B
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
To select an option of a group (A).  
To turnon/off the checkboxes(C), and to open/close the droplists  
(B).  
After defining the new look, use the cursor to select one of the buttons here below  
to accept or ignore the changes made and press [ENTER].  
A
B
C
(A) To accept the changes and close the dialog box.  
(B) To ignore the changes and close the dialog box.  
(C) To apply the changes and close the dialog box.  
The dialogboxmay alsobe closed directlywithoutacceptingthechanges bypressing  
[ESC].  
CNC 8070  
Customizing "Auto-Save / Manual save"  
It is used to save the program automatically or manually.  
• When "auto-save" is on, the CNC will automatically save the program after every  
change.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
• If "Manual save" is active, it is up to the operator to save the program. See  
"6.3.2 File" on page 103.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Customizing "Autonumbering ON / Autonumbering OFF"  
It is used to turn on/off the autonumbering of the blocks. While autonumbering is  
active, the CNC will insert the block number automatically every time a new block is  
generated.  
Customizing "Autonumbering parameters"  
It is used for selecting the starting block number and the sequencing step for the  
following blocks when autonumbering the blocks.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting both data. After  
defining these values, press [ENTER] to accept them or [ESC] to ignore them.  
6.  
Customizing "TEACH-IN parameters"  
It may be used to set the behavior of each axis in TEACH-IN mode. The behavior of  
an axis is defined by the properties "visible" and "selected".  
"Visible"  
The axis is displayed in the TEACH-IN window.  
"Selected"  
The axis is included in the blocks that are edited by  
pressing the [RECALL] key.  
Depending on these properties, one of the following behaviors may be assigned to  
the axes:  
• Selected and visible:  
TheaxisisdisplayedintheTEACH-IN windowanditisincludedintheblocksbeing  
edited by pressing the [RECALL] key.  
• Not selected and visible:  
The axis is displayed in the TEACH-IN window, but it is not included in the blocks  
being edited by pressing the [RECALL] key.  
• Not selected and not visible:  
The axis is neither displayed in the TEACH-IN window nor included in the blocks  
being edited by pressing the [RECALL] key.  
After defining the behavior of the axes, press [ENTER] to accept the selection or  
[ESC] to reject it.  
Show / Hide cycles and profiles  
It is used for selecting whether the contents of the conversational canned cycles and  
profiles will be shown or hidden in the program.  
• If the "Show" option is active, it will show the full contents of the canned cycle and  
the profile.  
• If the "Hide" option is active, only the name of the canned cycle and the profile  
will be shown.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.3.7 Profile editor  
It is used for accessing the profile editor.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the profile editor options. To  
return to editing the program, press "End".  
6.  
The profile editor may also be accessed by selecting a profile in the program and  
pressing [RECALL].  
The section on "6.9 Profile editor" of this chapter offers a more detailed description  
on how to use the profile editor.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.3.8 Canned cycles  
It is used to access the conversational canned cycles.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available canned cycles. To  
return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Whenselectingacanned cycle, theCNCdisplaysthe windowfordefiningthatcanned  
cycle. Some of these canned cycles may be associated with multiple machining so  
it is repeated at all points.  
6.  
The cycle defining window may also be accessed by selecting a canned cycle in the  
program and pressing [RECALL].  
The cycle being edited may also be simulated in the window for defining the  
conversational canned cycle.  
The programming manual offers a more detailed description of how to define and/or  
simulate conversational canned cycles.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.3.9 TEACH-IN ON / TEACH-IN OFF  
It is used to activate or deactivate the TEACH-IN mode; in this mode, the axes may  
be moved manually and their position may be assigned to a block.  
When active, the top of the editing window shows the position of the axes defined as  
“visible” for the TEACH-IN mode. See "6.3.6 Customizing" on page 107.  
6.  
When TEACH-IN mode is active, it is possible to keep editing the coordinates of the  
axes directly from the keyboard or they may be assigned the current position of the  
machine axes. Both editing methods may be used indistinctly, even while defining a  
block.  
To define the coordinates of one or several axes using TEACH-IN:  
1. Move the axes to the desired position using the JOG keys, the handwheels or the  
MDI mode.  
2. In the part-program, edit the name of the axes whose position is to be defined or  
not select any axis if you wish to define the position of all of them.  
3. Press the [RECALL] key.  
• If an axis has been edited, the CNC assigns the current position of that axis  
as the program coordinate. The axis is displayed in the TEACH-IN window.  
• If no axis has been edited, a block is edited with the current position of all the  
axes defined as “selected” for the TEACH-IN mode. See  
"6.3.6 Customizing" on page 107.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.4  
Graphics window  
It is used to show a graphic representation of the program being simulated and take  
measurements over the drawing.  
Description of the graphics window  
The graphic window shows the following information:  
6.  
B
A
C
D
A. Display area.  
It shows a graphic representation of the tool paths or of the part as the program  
is being simulated.  
B. Dialog area.  
It shows the position of the axes and the machining conditions active during  
simulation (feedrate, spindle speed, tool and tool offset).  
When selecting specific options of the softkey menu, it shows the information  
associated with that option which may be defined by the user.  
C. Information area.  
Shows the work plane appearing in the display area and an illustration  
representing the size of the graph and the portion of the graphic area selected  
with the zoom.  
On 3D graphics, the illustration shows the point of view of the graph displayed and  
it may be changed by the operator.  
Keys for selecting the point of view  
Select a new point of view.  
Assumes the new point of view selected.  
Cancels the selected point point of view.  
CNC 8070  
D. "G" functions active during simulation.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Softkey menus of the graphics window  
When selecting the graphic window, the horizontal softkey menu shows the options  
associated with that window. The set of options offered by this menu may be changed  
using the "+" softkey which offers a new set of options.  
The options available in the softkey menu are the following. See "6.5 Graphic  
window (softkeys)" on page 117.  
‡ "Type of graphics"  
To select the type of graphics.  
6.  
‡ "ZOOM"  
To enlarge or reduce the whole graph shown or part of it.  
‡ "Dimensions"  
To define the size of the graphic representation.  
‡ "Point of view"  
To change the point of view of the graph and show it from another perspective.  
‡ "Measurement"  
To measure the distance between two points.  
‡ "Clear screen"  
It is used to clear the screen or delete the graphics displayed.  
‡ "Colors"  
To set the appearance of the graphics on display.  
‡ "Options"  
To set the appearance and some options of the graphic window.  
‡ "Speed"  
To change the simulation speed.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.4.1 Program simulation  
The graphic window shows the program selected at the editing window and its name  
appears at the bottom center of the screen.  
6.  
Program selected for simulation.  
The program simulation procedure is the following:  
1. Choose the type of graphic representation, its dimensions and the point of view.  
This data may also be modified during the simulation of the program.  
2. Activate the desired simulation options using the icon menu.  
3. Press the START icon to start the simulation. The simulation may be interrupted  
with the STOP icon or canceled with the RESET icon.  
STOP  
RESET  
START  
The simulation of the program starts at the first block of the program and ends after  
executing one of the end-of-program functions "M02" or "M30". As an option, it is  
possible to define the first and last blocks of the simulation. See "6.6 Program  
window" on page 126.  
"Single block" mode of simulation.  
If the –single block– mode is active, program execution will interrupted at the end of  
each block; the [START] icon must be pressed again to continue.  
The –single block– mode is selected from the icon menu and may be selected before  
or while simulating the program.  
Simulation options  
The available simulation options are accessed from the icon menu. Pressing the icon  
displays a window that shows the following options.  
Tool radius compensation  
CNC 8070  
It activates or cancels tool radius compensation to simulate the program.  
Tool radius compensation being off, the simulation will ignore the programmed tool  
radius compensation.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Conditional stop during simulation  
It simulates the external "conditional stop" switch.  
While active, the program simulation will be interrupted at the blocks having a  
"conditional stop" function "M01". The simulation will resume when pressing the  
START icon.  
Software limits  
It activates or deactivates the software limits for program simulation.  
6.  
With the limits activated, if the software limits are reached during simulation, a  
simulation error message will be issued. If not active, the software limits will be  
ignored during simulation.  
Block jump  
It simulates the external "block skip" switch.  
While active, the blocks having the block-skip character "/" will be ignored (not  
simulated).  
Cancel channel synchronization  
There is one icon for each channel. It cancels the channel synchronization wait  
periods during simulation.  
When active, the wait period will end immediately and it will resume the execution  
of the program.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.4.2 Simulation errors  
Whenanerroroccurs, theCNCwilldisplaya windowdescribingthecauseoftheerror.  
These errors are displayed in the middle of the screen, regardless of which window  
is active.  
There are two types of errors. The top of the window shows the category and it will  
have a different color depending on the type of error it shows.  
WARNING  
6.  
They do not interrupt the simulation of the program.  
The window that shows them may be removed by pressing [ESC].  
ERROR  
They interrupt the simulation of the program.  
Although the window displaying them may be closed by pressing [ESC], it does not  
mean that the error status has been taken care of; to do that, press the [RESET] icon.  
The program can be neither edited nor simulated while the error stays state active.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.5  
Graphic window (softkeys)  
6.5.1 Type of graphics  
To select the type of graphics.  
The various types of graphics may be line (3D lines, XY, XZ, YZ and Combined) or  
solid (Sections and 3D solid). Line graphics show the tool path with lines of different  
colors and solid graphics show an image of the part being simulated.  
6.  
The type of graphics selected will remain active until another type is selected or the  
graphic display is deactivated or the CNC is turned off. Likewise, when changing the  
type of graphics, the CNC will maintain the graphic conditions (zoom, graphic  
parameters, display area, etc.), defined for the last graphic.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the types of graphics available.  
To return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
"3D lines" Graphics  
It displays a three-dimensional graph of the tool paths.  
"Sections" Graphics  
It displays a top view (XY plane) of the part being simulated; it shows the machining  
depths in different tones. It also displays the XZ and YZ sections for the areas shown  
by the indicators of the top view.  
These indicators may be moved around using the [©][ª][§][¨] keys, to display the  
different sections of the part. The CNC shows dynamically the new section being  
selected.  
The indicators may be moved at any time even while simulating the program.  
"XY" - "XZ" - "YZ" graphics  
It displays the tool paths in the XY, XZ or YZ plane.  
"Combined" graphics  
It divides the display area in four quadrants and displays the tool path corresponding  
to each plane XY, XZ, YZ and to the 3D view.  
"Solid 3D" Graphics  
It shows a 3D view of the part being simulated. Starting out with a 3D block which  
is "machined" as the program is simulated.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.5.2 Zoom  
To enlarge or reduce the whole graph shown or part of it. This option is not available  
in the "Combined" type of graphics.  
After selecting the zoom option, a zoom frame will appear over the graphics. This  
frame may be enlarged, reduced and moved around over the graphics already  
displayed in order to select a particular portion of it to zoom into or out of.  
Keys for selecting the zoom  
6.  
To move the zoom frame around.  
To change the size of the zoom frame.  
To validate and display the selected zoom area.  
The graphics at the lower right-hand side of the screen shows two figures. The one  
shown with lines only, indicates the dimensions of the display area and the one with  
colored sides indicates the portion selected with the zoom.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available zoom options. To  
return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Zoom "Initial"  
Restores the size of the display are set via program or using the "Dimensions"option.  
Zoom "Automatic"  
The CNC uses the zoom that it considers best according to the movements  
programmed.  
Zoom "Previous"  
It displays up to two zooms defined earlier. After the second one, it shows again the  
one defined last.  
Zoom "Limits"  
Onlyforthe"Sections"type.Inthisgraphics, zoomingisdonebymovingtheindicators  
that appear framing the graphic sections.  
With this option, it is possible to select the axis whose indicator is to be moved.  
The indicator may also be selected with the "+" and "-" keys of the numeric keyboard  
in a rotary fashion (Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, Ymax, Zmin, Zmax).  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Zoom "Edit"  
It is used to manually editthe zoom values. It is edited in the dialog area of the graphic  
window that shows the dimensions of the zoom frame  
Keys for defining the zoom  
To move the cursor through the data.  
To validate and display the defined zoom area.  
To cancel the defined zoom.  
6.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.5.3 Dimensions  
It is used to define the size of the graphic representation by setting the maximum and  
minimum coordinates of the graphics on each axis.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the options available for setting  
the dimensions. To return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Dimensions "Automatic"  
The CNC sets the dimensions that it considers best according to the movements  
programmed.  
6.  
Dimensions "Edit"  
It is used to manually edit the dimension values. It is edited in the graphic window  
that shows the dimensions of the graphics on each axis.  
Keys for setting the dimensions  
To move the cursor through the data.  
To validate and display the set dimensions.  
To cancel the set dimensions.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.5.4 Point of view  
It is used to select the point of view on 3D graphics.  
The orientation of the graphics may be directly selected at the graphic window by  
orienting the XY plane and the Z axis. The XY plane may be rotated 360º and the  
Z axis 90º. The figure at the lower right-hand side of the screen shows the point of  
view currently selected.  
Keys for selecting the point of view  
6.  
To orient the XY plane.  
To orient the Z axis.  
To validate and display the selected point of view.  
To cancel the selected point point of view.  
When selectingthis option, thesoftkey menushowstheoptionsavailablefor selecting  
the point of view. To return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Point of view "Edit"  
It is used to manually edit the orientation of the axes of the graphics. It is edited in  
the dialog area of the graphic window that shows the current orientation of the axes.  
Keys for defining the point of view  
To move the cursor through the data.  
To validate and display the defined point of view.  
To cancel the defined point of view.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.5.5 Measurement  
Tomeasurethe distancebetweentwopoints.Thisoptionisonlyavailableforthetypes  
of graphics "XY", "XZ", "YZ" and "Solid 3D".  
When selecting this option, the section being measured will appear on the graphics  
with two cursors and a dashed line. The cursor currently selected will appear in red.  
Keys to move the cursors  
To move the selected cursor.  
6.  
To select the cursor to be moved.  
The dialog area will show the coordinates of both cursors, the distance between them  
on the straight line and the components of that distance on the axes of the active  
plane. The coordinates of the selected cursor will appear in red.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To return  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Measurement "Point1" & "Point2"  
It is used to select the cursor to be moved (same as using the "+" key).  
Measurement "Edit"  
It is used to manually edit the position of the cursors. It is edited in the dialog area  
of the graphic window that shows the position of both cursors.  
Keys for defining the measurement  
To move the cursor through the data.  
To validate the selected position of the cursors.  
6.5.6 Clear screen  
It is used to clear the screen or delete the graphics displayed.  
If a solid graphic type is selected, the graphic representation will be reset and it will  
return to its initial state without machining.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.5.7 Colors  
It is used to change the colors used in the graphic representation.  
‡ Path colors  
When a line graphics is active, it will set:  
The color to draw the rapid traverse.  
The color to draw the canned cycles.  
The color to draw the compensated path.  
The color to draw the theoretical path.  
The color to draw the threading.  
The background color of the window.  
‡ Colors for solids  
6.  
When solid graphics is active, it will set:  
The color to draw the outside X.  
The color to draw the inside X.  
The color to draw the outside Y.  
The color to draw the inside Y.  
The color to draw the outside Z.  
The color to draw the inside Z.  
The background color of the window.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To return  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Colors "Apply"  
Itassumes the new colorsand appliesthem totheblocks drawnnext. Ifthe new colors  
are not applied, the graphics are drawn with the old colors.  
Colors "Edit"  
It is used to select the new colors for the graphics. They are selected in the dialog  
area of the graphic window that show the current colors.  
Keys for defining colors  
To move the cursor through the data.  
To open and close the color palettes.  
To move the cursor through the colors of the palette.  
To cancel the selected colors.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.5.8 Options  
It is used to set the appearance and some functions of the graphic window. These  
options may be used at any time, even while simulating a program.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To  
return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Option "Activate" / "Deactivate"  
It is used to activate or deactivate the graphic representation.  
6.  
When the graphic representation is deactivated and activated, the current graphic is  
erased; but the display conditions are kept active (type of graphics, zoom, graphic  
parameters and display area) that were active before that mode was deactivated.  
Option "Simple" / "Combined"  
It is used to hide or show the dialog and data areas on the right-hand side of the  
graphic window so the drawing occupies the whole graphic window.  
Option "Hide Tool" / "Show Tool"  
It is used to hide or show the tool while simulating in "3D solid" graphics.  
Option "Print"  
It is used to print the graphics in a printer connected to the CNC or as a file (BMP  
format) at the CNC. When printing to a file, it is saved in the folder:  
"C:\Cnc8070\Users\Reports\*.bmp"  
When selecting this option, the CNC will show a dialog box requesting the print  
destination (printer or file).  
Print destination  
To select the print destination.  
To print the drawing.  
To cancel the printing.  
After selecting the destination, press [ENTER] to print it or [ESC] to cancel it.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Option "Print setup"  
It is used to set the printing configuration.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box where the following may be  
defined:  
A. The title of the graphics that will appear next to it in the print.  
B. The name of the file where the graphics will be stored when printing out to a file.  
Print configuration  
6.  
A
B
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
To accept the configuration defined.  
To cancel the defined configuration.  
After filling out the data, press [ENTER] to accept them or [ESC] to cancel them.  
6.5.9 Speed  
To change the simulation speed.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the options to set the simulation  
speed. To return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Speed "Edit"  
It is used to select the new simulation speed. It is selected using the graduated ruler  
that indicates the active simulation speed.  
Keys for defining the measurement  
To move the ruler cursor.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.6  
Program window  
It shows the contents of the program selected for simulation and allows selecting the  
first and last blocks of the simulation. When not selected, the simulation will begin  
at the first block of the block and will end after executing one of the end-of-program  
functions "M02" or "M30".  
While simulating, the window cursor will show the block being simulated.  
6.  
Description of the program window  
The program window shows the following information:  
A
B
C
A. Title bar.  
Name of the program selected for simulation.  
B. Program blocks.  
Contents of the program selected for simulation. While simulating, the cursor will  
indicate the block being simulated.  
C. Program line.  
Line of the program where the cursor is.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Softkey menus of the program window  
When selecting the program window, the horizontal softkey menu will show the  
options related to this window.  
The options available in the softkey menu are the following. See "6.7 Program  
window (softkeys)" on page 128.  
‡ "First block"  
To set the first block of the simulation.  
‡ "Stop condition"  
6.  
To select the block where the simulation of the program or subroutine will be  
interrupted.  
‡ "Find text"  
To find text in a program.  
‡ "Go to line"  
To position the cursor on a particular line of the program.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.7  
Program window (softkeys)  
6.7.1 First block  
It sets as the first simulation block, the block where the cursor is. When not setting  
the first block, the simulation will begin at the first block of the program.  
Thelastblockmaybeselectedusingthe cursororthe"Findtext"or"Gotoline"options  
of the softkey menu.  
6.  
Keys to move the cursor  
Moves the cursor line by line.  
To move the cursor page by page.  
Moves the cursor to the first block or to the end of the program.  
The first block defined, remains active untilcanceled (with [ESC]) or until the program  
is simulated; in that case, the first block of the program will become the first block of  
the simulation.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.7.2 Stop condition  
It is used to establish, in the program or in a subroutine, the block where the program  
simulation will be interrupted. After executing that block, the simulation may be  
resumed with the [START] icon or canceled with the [RESET] icon.  
RESET  
START  
If no last block is established, the simulation of the program will end after executing  
one of the end-of-program functions "M02" or "M30".  
6.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu of the CNC shows the options available  
for selecting the stop condition. To return to the main menu, press the key for the  
previous menu.  
Subroutine selection  
To select the stop condition in a global subroutine which has been called upon from  
the program. When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of programs available  
for selecting the desired subroutine.  
Keys for selecting a program  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To open the selected subroutine.  
To cancel the selection and close the program listing.  
To select a subroutine from the list.  
1. Select from the list the program containing the subroutine or write its name in the  
bottom window.  
2. Press [ENTER] to open the program or [ESC] to cancel the selection and close  
the program listing.  
The program window will show the contents of the selected subroutine.  
Last block  
It sets the cursor position as the block where simulation is interrupted. If no last block  
is established, the simulation of the program will end after executing one of the end-  
of-program functions "M02" or "M30".  
Thelastblockmaybeselectedusingthecursororthe"Findtext"or"Gotoline"options  
of the softkey menu.  
Keys to move the cursor  
Moves the cursor line by line.  
To move the cursor page by page.  
Moves the cursor to the first block or to the end of the program.  
The established lastblock remains active until itis canceled(with [ESC]) ora program  
is simulated; in that case, the execution of one of the functions "M02" or "M30" is set  
as the stop condition.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Number of times  
It sets as stop condition, that the block selected as the last block has been executed  
a specific number of times.  
When selecting this option, the CNC requests the number of times the block must  
be executed before finishing. After entering the number of times, press [ENTER] to  
validate the value or [ESC] to cancel it.  
6.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.7.3 Find text  
To find text or a character string throughout the program.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be  
found. It is also possible to select whether the search must start at the beginning of  
the program or at cursor position.  
Find text  
6.  
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
It selects an option from a group.  
To start the search.  
To cancel the search and close the dialog box.  
To start the search, press [ENTER] and the cursor will position on the text found. By  
pressing [ENTER] again, the CNC will look for the next match and so on.  
To end the search, press [ESC]. The cursor will position on the block containing the  
text searched.  
6.7.4 Go to line  
To position the cursor on a particular line of the program.  
When selecting this option, the CNC requests the line number to go to. Key in the  
desired number and press [ENTER], the cursor will then go to that line.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.8  
Statistics window  
It shows an estimate of the total execution time of the program and of the machining  
time for each tool.  
Description of the statistics window  
This statistics window shows the following information:  
6.  
A
B
C
A. General information.  
It shows a time estimate of program execution at 100% of the programmed  
feedrate, the number of "M" functions executed and the number of tool changes  
made.  
B. Machining time for each tool.  
It shows a list of the tools used in the program indicating the machining time for  
each tool and the total positioning time.  
C. "G" functions active during simulation.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.8.1 Time estimates  
The statistics window shows an estimate of the execution of the program selected  
in the editing window, and whose name appears at the bottom center of the screen.  
6.  
Program selected for time estimate.  
The process to estimate time is the following:  
1. Use the program window to select the first and last block for the execution time  
estimate.  
If not selected, the execution time estimate will be done from the first block of the  
program to the execution of one of the end-of-program functions "M02" or "M30".  
2. Activate the desired simulation options using the icon menu.  
3. Start the estimate calculation by pressing its TIMES icon.  
Simulation options  
These options may also be turned on or off while simulating the program. When they  
are active, its corresponding icon of the icon menu will appear pressed.  
The simulation options available are:  
"Single block" mode  
It selects the "single block" mode so the execution time calculation is interrupted at  
the end of each block.  
Block jump  
It simulates the external "block skip" switch.  
When active, the CNC will NOT calculate the execution time of the blocks containing  
the block-skip character "/".  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9  
Profile editor  
The profile editor looks like this.  
B
C
6.  
A
D
E
A. Graphic area  
Graphic representation of the profile being drawn.  
B. Displayed area.  
It indicates the size of the graphic area. It is given by the maximum and minimum  
coordinates of each axis.  
It also shows the status of the "Autozoom" option.  
C. Work plane.  
It shows which are the axes that make up the work plane at the profile editor and  
the direction of each one of them. The lower left corner of the graphics window  
is taken as the origin of the coordinate system.  
D. Data entry and display area.  
Area used to enter and display the data of the elements that make up the profiles.  
E. It is used to enter the values of the corners or the ISO coded text to be added to  
the element.  
Softkey menu  
The options that may be selected from the softkey menu make it possible to edit  
profiles, modify edited profiles, select the zoom, the work plane, undo the last change  
and end the editing session.  
While editing or modifying the profile, the softkey menu offers the option to undo the  
last operation. Likewise, it offers the option to save the profile at any time.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
When accessing the profile editor, the softkey menu shows the following options:  
‡ Edit  
To select the type of profile to be edited. Also too enlarge a profile, import a profile  
saved in DXF format.  
‡ Modify  
To modify, insert or delete elements of a profile.  
‡ Displayed area  
To modify the zoom of the graphics area.  
‡ Plane  
6.  
To select the axes of the plane and their direction.  
‡ End  
It ends the profile editing session. Before exiting the profile editor, it will offer the  
option to save or not the edited profile.  
‡ Undo  
To "undo" the last operation made.  
‡ Save and continue  
To save the profile and continue editing. Using this key does not require that the  
profile be completed.  
If the profile has been resolved, the CNC will insert it in the part program that is being  
edited. If the profile cannot be resolved due to lack of data, the CNC will issue the  
relevant message.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.1 Operating procedure  
Severalprofiles may be edited without having to exit the profile editor. To edit a profile,  
proceed as follows:  
1. Select the type of profile to be edited, such as a circular or rectangular profile or  
any profile.  
2. For a rectangular or circular profile, define its data and insert it. For any profile,  
first select the starting point of the profile.  
Once the first point has been selected, draw the profile, which will be made up  
of straight and curved sections. If it has corner rounding, chamfering or tangential  
entries and exits, use one of these methods:  
6.  
• Treat them as individual sections when having enough information to define  
them.  
• Ignore them while defining the profile and, once it has been defined, select  
the corners that have those characteristics and insert them.  
3. End the profile editing session by inserting them into the program.  
The portion of ISO-code program corresponding to the edited profile will be  
identified with the line "(#PROFILE)" or it will appear framed between the lines  
"(#PROFILE BEGIN)" and "(#PROFILE END)".  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.2 Data editing  
All data need not be defined; but it is recommended to define all the known data. To  
define the profile data, proceed as follows:  
1. Press the softkey corresponding to the data to be defined.  
2. Key in the desired value (which may be a numeric constantor an expression). Use  
the[SPACE]keytochange the value ofanon-numericaldata (tangency, direction,  
etc.).  
3. Press [ENTER] to accept the defined value or [ESC] to reject it and return to the  
previous one. If the entered value is accepted, the CNC will select the next data.  
6.  
Once all the data has been defined, press the "Validate" softkey and the CNC will  
show the profile that has been defined.  
Displaying incomplete sections  
If there isn't enough data to show the defined section, the CNC will draw as much  
of it as it knows. The sections that are not fully defined will be shown with a dash line.  
If there are more than one possibility, it will show the available options one by one  
except the ones that could generate tangency errors later on; select the desired  
option. The sections with several possibilities will be shown in green whereas the rest  
of the sections will be shown in white.  
X1 = ?  
Y1 = ?  
X2 = ?  
Y2 = ?  
Angle = 60º  
Tangent = Yes  
X1 = 40  
X2 = ?  
Xc = ?  
Y1 = 30  
Y2 = ?  
Yc = ?  
Radius = 20  
Tangent = Yes  
To select the available options.  
To assume the selected option.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.3 Profile definition  
With the softkey menu of this screen, it is possible to define any profile, a circular or  
a rectangular one or to configure the graphics screen.  
When accessing the editing menu, the softkey menu shows the following options:  
‡ Profile  
To edit any profile by defining the straight and curved sections that make it up.  
See "6.9.6 Defining any profile" on page 141.  
‡ Circle  
6.  
For quickly defining a circular profile. See "6.9.4 Circular profile definition" on  
page 139.  
‡ Rectangle  
For quickly defining a rectangular profile. See "6.9.5 Rectangular profile  
definition" on page 140.  
‡ Expanding a profile  
For adding a straight line or an arc in any position of a previously edited profile.  
‡ Import profile  
For importing a previously saved profile.  
These profiles may also be imported in DXF format besides in ISO format.  
‡ Undo  
To "undo" the last operation made.  
‡ Save and continue  
To save the profile and continue editing. Using this key does not require that the  
profile be completed.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.4 Circular profile definition  
Thesoftkeymenushowsthenecessaryoptionsfordefininga circularprofile.Toreturn  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
X Y  
To define the coordinates of the profile's starting point.  
To define the profile's center coordinate along the abscissa axis.  
To define the profile's center coordinate along the ordinate axis.  
To define the profile radius.  
Xcenter  
Ycenter  
Radius  
Direction  
Validate  
6.  
To define the direction of the profile (clockwise or counterclockwise).  
To accept and draw the defined profile.  
Clockwise arc  
Counterclockwise arc  
X Y  
Coordinates of the profile's starting point.  
Profile’s center coordinates.  
Radius of the profile.  
Xc, Yc  
R
The data is defined in the data area of the screen where the following information is  
shown:  
X1, Y1  
XC  
Coordinates of the profile's starting point.  
Profile's center coordinate along the abscissa axis.  
Profile's center coordinate along the ordinate axis.  
Radius of the arc.  
YC  
RADIUS  
DIRECTION  
It indicates the direction of the profile.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.5 Rectangular profile definition  
The softkey menu shows the necessary options for defining a rectangular profile. To  
return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
X Y  
To define the coordinates of the profile's starting point.  
To define the profile's length along the abscissa axis.  
To define the profile's length along the ordinate axis.  
To define the angle of the profile referred to the abscissa axis.  
To define the direction of the profile (clockwise or counterclockwise).  
To accept and draw the defined profile.  
Length X  
6.  
Length Y  
Angle  
Direction  
Validate  
Clockwise arc  
Counterclockwise arc  
X Y  
Coordinates of the profile's starting point.  
Length of the profile along both axis.  
Angle of the profile with the abscissa axis.  
Lx, Ly  
το  
The data is defined in the data area of the screen where the following information is  
shown:  
X1, Y1  
XL  
Coordinates of the profile's starting point.  
Profile's length along the abscissa axis.  
Profile's length along the ordinate axis.  
Angle of the profile with the abscissa axis.  
It indicates the direction of the profile.  
YL  
ANGLE  
DIRECTION  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.6 Defining any profile  
To define a new profile, the CNC request the starting point of the profile. Define it with  
the relevant softkeys and press the "Validate" softkey. The graphic area will show the  
profile's starting point.  
Once the profile's starting point has been defined, the softkey menu will show the  
necessary options to define the profile. To return to the main menu, press the key for  
the previous menu.  
‡ Straight  
6.  
To edit a straight section.  
‡ Clockwise arc  
To edit a clockwise arc.  
‡ Counterclockwise arc  
To edit a counterclockwise arc.  
‡ New profile  
To edit a new profile.  
‡ Modify the last one  
For modifying the last section of the profile.  
Definition of a straight section  
To define a straight section, the softkey menu shows the necessary options to define  
the data for the section.  
X Y  
To define the section's end point.  
Angle  
To define the angle of the straight section with the abscissa axis.  
To define whether the section is tangent to the previous path.  
To accept and draw the defined section.  
Tangency  
Validate  
The data is defined in the data area of the screen where the following information is  
shown:  
X1, Y1  
Coordinates of the section's starting point. They cannot be modified because they  
belong to the endpoint of the previous section.  
X2, Y2  
Coordinates of the section's endpoint.  
ANGLE  
Angle of the straight section with the abscissa axis.  
It indicates whether or not the section is tangent to the previous path.  
TANGENCY  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Definition of a curved section (clockwise or counterclockwise)  
To define a curved section, the softkey menu shows the necessary options to define  
the data for the section.  
X Y  
To define the section's end point.  
Center X  
To define the arc's center coordinate along the abscissa axis.  
To define the arc's center coordinate along the ordinate axis.  
To define the arc radius.  
Center Y  
Radius  
6.  
Tangency  
Validate  
To define whether the section is tangent to the previous path.  
To accept and draw the defined section.  
The data is defined in the data area of the screen where the following information is  
shown:  
X1, Y1  
Coordinates of the section's starting point. They cannot be modified because they  
belong to the endpoint of the previous section.  
X2, Y2  
Xc  
Coordinates of the section's endpoint.  
Coordinates of the section's center along the abscissa axis.  
Coordinates of the section's center along the ordinate axis.  
Radius of the arc.  
Yc  
RADIUS  
TANGENCY  
It indicates whether or not the section is tangent to the previous path.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.7 Modify a profile and insert corners  
To modify the defined profiles by either modifying or deleting the existing elements  
or inserting new elements. Likewise, it is possible to insert rounding, chamfers and  
tangential entries or exits.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu will show the necessary options to  
modify the profile.  
‡ Modify element  
It is possible to modify any data of a section of the profile.  
6.  
Once the desired element has been selected, one may modify the type of section  
(straight or arc) or its data. Once the element has been modified, press "Validate"  
to confirm the changes.  
The CNC recalculates the new profile according to the data used to define that  
section and the next one (tangency, angle, etc.)  
‡ Insert element  
To insert a new element in any position of the profile.  
Afterselecting the section after which the elementistobe inserted, selectthe type  
of section (straight or arc) to be inserted, define its parameters and press the  
"Validate" softkey.  
The CNC recalculates the new profile according to the data used to define that  
section and the next one (tangency, angle, etc.)  
‡ Delete element  
To delete an element of the selected profile.  
Once the element to be deleted has been selected, confirm the command by  
pressing [ENTER].  
The CNC recalculates the new profile.  
‡ Corners  
To include rounding, chamfers, tangential entries or exits in the defined profile.  
See "Corner definition" on page 144.  
‡ Additional ISO  
For adding an ISO coded line to a previously closed profile.  
Once the ISO coded line to be added has been entered, confirm the command  
by pressing the [ENTER] key.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Corner definition  
To include rounding, chamfers, tangential entries or exits in the defined profile.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the type of corners that can be  
inserted.  
‡ Rounding  
To insert a rounding at the profiles corners where it is possible.  
‡ Chamfer  
6.  
To insert a chamfer at the profiles corners where it is possible.  
‡ Tangential entry  
To add a tangential tool entry at the beginning of the profile.  
‡ Tangential exit  
To add a tangential tool exit at the end of the profile.  
Once the type of corner to be inserted has been selected, the CNC will highlight in  
red one of the corners of the profile.  
Keys to select a corner  
To select a corner of the profile.  
To select a corner of another profile.  
Select the profile corner to be modified and the CNC will request the value (radius  
or size) of the corner to be inserted:  
• For a rounding, enter the rounding radius.  
• For a chamfer, enter the size of the chamfer.  
• For a tangential entry, enter the entry radius.  
• For a tangential exit, enter the exit radius.  
After defining the value of the corner, press [ENTER]to insert the cornerin the profile.  
Then, one may select another corner or quit this mode by pressing [ESC].  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.8 Display area  
The softkey menu ofthis screen maybe used tomodify the zoom of the graphicsarea.  
When accessing the "display area" menu, the softkey menu shows the following  
options:  
‡ Zoom +, zoom -  
To enlarge or reduce the display area.  
Use the arrow keys to move the drawings of the profiles. Use the "+" and "-" keys  
of the keyboard to enlarge or reduce the drawings of the profiles.  
6.  
‡ Optimum area  
Itselects the bestdisplay area, i.e. it places the profile in the centerof the graphics  
area and selects the best zoom possible to show the whole profile.  
‡ Autozoom  
When applying Autozoom, every time a new section is inserted which goes  
beyond the screen, the profile will automatically be centered and zoomed in or  
out to show the whole profile. This way, it will show the whole profile again.  
‡ Validate  
It may be used to confirm the changes made.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.9 Work plane definition  
The softkey menu of this screen may be used to modify the axes of the plane and  
their directions.  
When accessing the plane menu, the softkey menu shows the following options:  
‡ Abscissa axis  
For selecting the abscissa axis among X, Y and Z.  
‡ Abscissa direction  
For selecting the direction of the abscissa axis between + and -.  
‡ Ordinate axis  
6.  
For selecting the ordinate axis among X, Y and Z.  
‡ Ordinate direction  
For selecting the direction of the ordinate axis between + and -.  
‡ Validate  
It may be used to confirm the changes made.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.10 End  
Itendsthe profileeditingsession. Whenselectingthis option,thesoftkeymenushows  
the following options.  
‡ Save profile  
It inserts the profile in the program and exits the profile editor.  
‡ Do not save profile  
It does not insert the profile in the program and it exits the profile editor.  
‡ Continue  
6.  
It does not insert the profile in the program and it goes on editing profile.  
If the profile has been resolved, the CNC will insert it in the part program that is being  
edited. If the profile cannot be resolved due to lack of data, the CNC will issue the  
relevant message.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.11 Profile editor. Example 1  
6.  
Profile definition without rounding, chamfers or tangential entries and exits.  
Starting point X = 80 Y =-20  
Straight X = 80  
Straight X = 20  
Straight X = 20  
Straight X = 60  
Y =20  
Y =20  
Y =80  
Y =80  
Y =80  
Y =80  
Y =20  
Y =20  
Y =-20  
Counterclockwise arc X = 100  
Straight X = 140  
Center X = 80  
Center Y = 80  
Radius = 20  
Straight X = 140  
Straight X = 80  
Straight X = 80  
Definition of rounding, chamfers and tangential entries and exits  
Select the "CORNERS" option and define:  
Tangential entry Select point "1"  
Chamfer Select point "2"  
Rounding Select point "3"  
Rounding Select point "4"  
Rounding Select point "5"  
Rounding Select point "6"  
Chamfer Select point "7"  
Tangential exit Select point "1"  
Assign radius = 5  
Assign size = 10  
Assign radius = 10  
Assign radius = 5  
Assign radius = 5  
Assign radius = 10  
Assign size = 10  
Assign radius = 5  
Press [ENTER]  
Press [ENTER]  
Press [ENTER]  
Press [ENTER]  
Press [ENTER]  
Press [ENTER]  
Press [ENTER]  
Press [ENTER]  
Press [ESC] to quit the "CORNER" option.  
End of editing  
Select the "END" option and save the profile. The CNC quits the profile editor and  
inserts the profile in the part-program.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.12 Profile editor. Example 2  
6.  
Definition of a profile without rounding.  
Starting point  
Straight  
X = 100  
Y =20  
X = 80  
Y =20  
Straight  
X = 80  
Angle = 90  
Radius = 5  
Counterclockwise (1)  
arc  
Center X = 75  
Tangency = Yes  
Tangency = Yes  
Radius = 20  
Counterclockwise (2)  
arc  
Center X = 100  
Center X = 40  
Radius = 150  
Center Y = 80  
Clockwise arc  
Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 2. Select the correct one.  
The CNC shows the options for section 1. Select the correct one.  
Clockwise arc (3)  
Clockwise arc  
Radius = 200  
Center X = 80  
Tangency = Yes  
Center Y = 160  
Radius = 10  
Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 3. Select the correct one.  
Counterclockwise (4)  
arc  
Radius = 40  
Tangency = Yes  
Clockwise arc  
Center X = 120  
Center Y = 160  
Radius = 10  
Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 4. Select the correct one.  
Clockwise arc (5)  
Clockwise arc  
Radius = 200  
Tangency = Yes  
Center Y = 80  
Center X = 160  
Radius = 20  
Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 5. Select the correct one.  
Counterclockwise (6)  
arc  
Center X = 100  
Radius = 150  
Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 6. Select the correct one.  
Counterclockwise (7)  
arc  
Center X = 125  
Radius = 5  
Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 7. Select the correct one.  
Straight (8) X = 120 Y =20 Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 8. Select the correct one.  
X = 100 Y =20  
Straight  
CNC 8070  
Rounding definition "A" and "B".  
Select the "CORNERS" option and define:  
Rounding Select point "A"  
Rounding Select point "B"  
Assign radius = 5  
Assign radius = 5  
Press [ENTER]  
Press [ENTER]  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
Press [ESC] to quit the "CORNER" option.  
End of editing  
Select the "END" option and save the profile. The CNC quits the profile editor and  
inserts the profile in the part-program.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
6.9.13 Profile editor. Example 3  
6.  
Profile definition.  
Starting point  
Clockwise arc  
X = -60  
Y =0  
Center X = -60  
Center Y = 20  
Tangency = Yes  
Radius = 20  
Straight (1)  
Angle = 60  
The CNC shows the options for section 1. Select the correct one.  
Counterclockwise (2)  
arc  
Radius = 15  
Tangency = Yes  
Straight (3)  
Clockwise arc  
Angle = -70  
Tangency = Yes  
Center Y = 110  
Center X = -40  
Radius = 25  
Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 3. Select the correct one.  
The CNC shows the options for section 2. Select the correct one.  
Counterclockwise (4)  
arc  
Radius = 15  
Tangency = Yes  
Straight  
Y =130  
Angle = 0  
Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 4. Select the correct one.  
Clockwise arc (5) Center X = 50 Radius = 15 Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 5. Select the correct one.  
Counterclockwise (6)  
arc  
Radius = 40  
Tangency = Yes  
Straight  
X = 50  
Angle = 270  
Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 6. Select the correct one.  
Counterclockwise (7)  
arc  
Radius = 10  
Tangency = Yes  
Clockwise arc  
Center X = 40  
Center Y = 30  
Radius = 30  
Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 7. Select the correct one.  
Straight (8) X = -60 Y =0 Tangency = Yes  
The CNC shows the options for section 8. Select the correct one.  
End of editing  
CNC 8070  
Select the "END" option and save the profile. The CNC quits the profile editor and  
inserts the profile in the part-program.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MDI MODE  
7
MDI mode selection  
The MDI mode may be accessed from any other operating mode, except when a  
program is in execution (even it is interrupted) by pressing its relevant key.  
This work mode may be accessed from any channel. The blocks are executed in the  
active channel.  
The MDI mode lays over all the other work modes in such a way that when quitting  
the MDI mode by pressing [ESC], the CNC goes into the work mode from where the  
MDI mode was accessed.  
Operations in MDI mode  
The following operations are possible in this work mode:  
• Edit and execute individual blocks.  
• Save the set of blocks executed as an independent program.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
7.1  
Appearance of the MDI mode  
When this operating mode is active, it will be indicated at the top right side of the  
general status bar.  
This mode may be displayed with several screens. The current screen and the total  
number of available screens are shown at the upper right hand side of the general  
status bar.  
Switchingbetweenthedifferentscreens isdoneby pressingthe MDImodeaccessing  
key. The screen selection is rotary in such a way that when pressing this key on the  
last screen, it shows the first one of the operating mode.  
7.  
Standard configuration  
The standard configuration of this work mode, described in this manual corresponds  
to the one supplied by Fagor. In some cases, the manual shows a sample screen,  
instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand.  
These screens may be customized by the machine manufacturer changing its  
contents as well as its appearance. They may also remove certain screens or add  
some of their own.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
7.1.1 Window description  
As mentioned earlier, the MDI mode may be displayed with two different windows  
(later sections of this chapter describe how to use them).  
Standard window  
The standard window only displays one edit line for editing new blocks.  
7.  
A
(A) Window for the MDI mode (Editing line).  
Full screen  
The full screen shows the blocks saved so far and an edit line for editing new blocks.  
A
B
(A) History of edited blocks.  
(B) Edit line.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
7.2  
Standard MDI window  
This window only shows the edit line of the MDI mode.  
It is possible to edit and execute new blocks or recover blocks saved in the block  
history, which may be modified before executing them.  
Description  
7.  
The standard MDI mode window shows the following information:  
A
A. Window for the MDI mode (Editing line).  
Window where theblocks to be executedareedited. Blocksareedited oneby one.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
7.2.1 Block editing and execution  
In this window, it is possible to edit and execute new blocks or the ones saved in the  
block history. Only the blocks previously executed will be saved in the block history.  
While editing, itanalyzes the syntax ofthe block being edited. When trying to execute,  
if the block is incorrect, it shows a warning message and it does not execute it.  
Block editing  
The blocks may be edited directly on the edit line or may be recalled from the block  
history.  
7.  
Keys for selecting a block from history  
To access the history and select a block.  
To accept the selection and show the block on the edit line.  
To cancel the selection and quit the MDI mode.  
The recalled blocks may be modified before executing them as ifthey were new ones.  
Block execution  
The blockon the editline is executedby pressing [START]atthe operatorpanel. Once  
the block has been executed is saved in the block history.  
The [STOP] key interrupts the execution of the block. Press [START] again to resume  
execution from where it was interrupted.  
The [RESET] key cancels the execution of the block and resets the CNC to its initial  
conditions.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
7.3  
Full MDI screen  
This window shows the blocks saved so far and the edit line of the MDI mode.  
It is possible to edit and execute new blocks or recover blocks saved in the block  
history, which may be modified before executing them.  
Description  
7.  
The full MDI mode screen shows the following information:  
A
B
A. History of edited blocks.  
The block history shows a list of the blocks edited in MDI mode. Every time a new  
block is edited, it is added to this history.  
B. Edit line.  
The blocksto beexecutedareedited onthe editline. Blocks areeditedoneby one.  
Softkey menu  
When selecting the full screen, the horizontal softkeys show the options related to  
this window.  
The options available in the softkeys menu are:  
‡ "New block"  
It positions the cursor on the edit line.  
‡ "Modify"  
Recovers the block selected by the cursor and it displays it on the edit line.  
This option is the same as pressing [ENTER].  
‡ "Delete"  
It deletes the block selected by the cursor.  
‡ "Cancel edit"  
CNC 8070  
It cancels the editing of the block and it shows an empty edit line.  
This option is only available when editing a block.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
‡ "Delete all"  
It deletes all the blocks from the block history.  
‡ "Save"  
It saves all the history blocks as an independent program.  
7.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
7.3.1 Block execution  
In this window, it is possible to edit and execute new blocks or the ones saved in the  
block history.  
Block editing  
The blocks may be edited directly on the edit line or may be recalled from the block  
history.  
7.  
Keys for selecting a block from history  
To access the history and select a block.  
To accept the selection and show the block on the edit line.  
To cancel the selection and quit the MDI mode.  
The recalled blocks may be modified before executing them as if they were new ones.  
The blocks edited or modified appearing on the edit line may be executed or saved  
in the block history.  
Saving a block  
Press [ENTER] to save a block in the history without executing it.  
If it is a new block, it will be added to the history whereas if it is modified block, it will  
replace the previous one in the history.  
Block execution  
The block on the editline is executedby pressing[START]atthe operator panel. Once  
the block has been executed is saved in the block history.  
The [STOP] key interrupts the execution of the block. Press [START] again to resume  
execution from where it was interrupted.  
The [RESET] key cancels the execution of the block and resets the CNC to its initial  
conditions.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
7.3.2 Save the blocks as a program  
To save the block history as an independent program, press the "Save" softkey and  
the CNC will show a list of the programs saved at the CNC.  
Keys for selecting a block from history  
To switch windows.  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To save the new program.  
7.  
To cancel the selection and close the program listing.  
To save the program:  
1. Write the program name in the bottom window. To replace an existing program,  
select it from the list.  
2. Press [ENTER] to save the program or [ESC] to return to the MDI mode without  
saving the program.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
7.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USER TABLES  
8
User table selection  
The CNC tables may be accessed from any other operating mode, even while a  
program is in execution, by pressing the key for these tables.  
The user tables consist of the following tables:  
• Zero offset table.  
• Clamp tables (fixtures).  
• Table of arithmetic parameters, global, local and common.  
In order to activate a fixture zero or part zero offset, those values must be previously  
stored in the relevant CNC table.  
What can you do in this work mode?  
The following operations are possible in this work mode:  
• Edit and modify the tables for zero offsets and parameters.  
• Save the content of a table.  
• Recover the content of a table.  
• Print the content of a table.  
• Initialize a table.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
8.1  
Appearance of the table mode  
This operating mode consists of several tables. The various tables may be selected  
using the horizontal softkeys.  
Some tables are common to all the channels and others belong to each channel. In  
this case, by default, they show the ones of the active channel; but it is possible to  
access those of any other channel from the vertical softkey menu.  
The zero offset tables and fixture offset tables are common to all the channels;  
however, in eachchannelthey show the axesofthatchannel. Whenapplyinganoffset  
in a channel, it is only applied to the axes that are part of the channel at the time.  
8.  
The tables available are:  
• Zero offset table.  
• Fixture table.  
• Table of global parameters. There is a table for each channel.  
• Table of local parameters. There are seven tables for each channel, one table per  
level.  
• Table of common parameters. The table is common to all the channels.  
Standard configuration  
The standard configuration of this work mode, described in this manual corresponds  
to the one supplied by Fagor. In some cases, the manual shows a sample screen,  
instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
8.1.1 Icon description (vertical softkeys)  
The icons are activated with their associated softkey (F8 to F12).  
The icon menu offers all the options for the selected table. The group of icons of this  
menu may be expanded with the softkey associated with the "+" icon that offers a new  
set of icons.  
8.  
List of icons  
Display units (millimeters/inches)  
To toggle the units for the position of the linear axes. Toggling these units does not  
affect the rotary axes which will always be displayed in degrees.  
The icon highlights the units currently selected (millimeters or inches).  
It must be borne in mind that the unit change is only valid for display and data entry.  
A program assumestheunitsdefinedwiththeactivefunction"G70"or"G71", or, when  
not programmed, the units set by the machine manufacturer.  
Initialize table  
Resets all the table data to "0". The CNC will request confirmation of the command.  
Find text  
It is used to find a text or a value in the table.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be  
found.  
Accessing the tables of other channels  
(This icon will only be available when using channels).  
Some tables only show the data of the active channel. This icon gives access to the  
tables of the other channels.  
Select axes  
It may be used to select the axes to be displayed in the tables.  
When using several channels, only those axes assigned to the active channel may  
be accessed.  
Save tool  
CNC 8070  
It saves the values of the table into a file. This file may be saved at the CNC, in a floppy  
disk or at another CNC (or PC) connected through Ethernet.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Recall table  
It restores the values of the table previously saved into a file.  
Print table  
It prints the contents of the table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a file  
(*.PRN format) at the CNC.  
8.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
8.2  
Zero offset tables  
This table stores the zero offsets for each axis. There are up to 20 absolute zero  
offsets and a special one for the PLC.  
Although the table is common to all the channels, when accessing from a channel,  
itonly showsthe axes ofthat channel. The offsets ofother channelsmay be accessed  
from the vertical softkey menu.  
A
8.  
B
C
A. Machine axes and display units (millimeters, inches or degrees).  
B. Zero offsets.  
C. Zero offset value in each axes of the channel.  
The end of this chapter describes how to edit this table.  
PLC offset  
It cannot be directly defined in the table. The values are set from the PLC or from the  
part-program using high-level variables.  
It is used, for example, to correct deviations originated by machine dilatations.  
The CNC always adds the PLC offset to the selected zero offset.  
Absolute zero offsets  
Besides setting the values directly in the table, they may also be set from the PLC  
or via part-program using high-level variables.  
The zero offsets are used to place the part zero at different positions of the machine.  
When applying a zero offset, the CNC assumes as the new part zero the point set  
by the selected zero offset referred to the clamp zero (if active).  
To apply an absolute zero offset, it must be activated via program using the relevant  
function.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
8.3  
Fixture table  
This table stores the clamp offsets for each axis. There are up to 10 clamp offsets.  
Although the table is common to all the channels, when accessing from a channel,  
itonly showstheaxesof thatchannel. The offsetsofother channels may be accessed  
from the vertical softkey menu.  
A
8.  
B
C
A. Machine axes and display units (millimeters, inches or degrees).  
B. Clamp offset.  
C. Clamp offset value in each axes of the channel.  
The end of this chapter describes how to edit this table.  
Fixture offset  
Besides setting the values directly in the table, they may also be set from the PLC  
or via part-program using high-level variables.  
The clamp offsets are used to set the position of the clamping system of the machine.  
When applying a clamp offset, the CNC assumes as new clamp zero the point set  
by the selected offset referred to machine reference zero (home).  
To apply a clamp offset it must be activated from the program using the relevant  
variable.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
8.4  
Arithmetic parameter tables  
There are the following arithmetic parameter tables:  
• Common parameters.  
• Global parameters.  
There is a table for each channel.  
• Local parameters.  
There are seven tables for each channel, one table per nesting level (7 levels).  
8.  
The CNC generates a new nesting level for local parameters every time parameters  
are assigned to a subroutine.  
A
B
A. Parameter list.  
B. Parameter value.  
The end of this chapter describes how to edit these tables.  
Arithmetic parameters  
The OEM defines the range of local and global parameters up to a maximum of 100  
local parameters (P0-P99) and 9900 global parameters (P100-P9999).  
When the local parameters are used in a subroutine calling block, they can also be  
referred to by the letters A-Z (except "Ñ") in such a way that "A" is the same as P0  
and"Z"isthesameasP25.Thatiswhythelocalparametertablesshowtheparameter  
number next to their associated letter.  
The parameter values may be set directly in the table or from the PLC or via part-  
program. In this case, the table values are updated after carrying out the operations  
indicated in the block being executed.  
The parameter values may be displayed either in decimal notation (6475.873) or  
scientific (0.654E-3).  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
8.5  
Operations with tables  
8.5.1 Data editing  
Select the desired table using the softkey menu:  
Keys for editing the table data  
To move the cursor through the table cells.  
8.  
To move the cursor page by page.  
To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the table.  
To validate the new value.  
To ignore the defined value.  
To edit the table data, proceed as follows:  
1. Use the cursor to select the cell whose value is to be changed.  
2. Key in the new value.  
3. Press [ENTER] to accept the new value or [ESC] to ignore the new value and  
recover the previous one.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
8.5.2 Save and recall tables  
Saving a table  
It may be used to save the table data, in ASCII format, in a file.  
After selecting the table whose data is to be saved, press the SAVE icon and the CNC  
shows a list with the tables that are already saved.  
8.  
Keys for selecting a data file  
To switch windows.  
To close and open a folder submenu.  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To save the new program.  
To cancel the selection and close the programs listing.  
To save the table data, proceed as follows:  
1. Select the destination folder.  
2. Define the filename atthe bottom window. To replace an existing file, selectit from  
the list.  
3. Press [ENTER]tosavethe fileor[ESC]toreturn tothetable withoutsaving thefile.  
Depending on the table being saved, the CNC will assign one of the following  
extensions to the file:  
Extension  
*.UPO  
Table type  
Zero offset table.  
Fixture table.  
*.UPF  
*.UPP  
Parameter tables.  
Recall a table  
It may be used to restore the table data, in ASCII format, from a file.  
After selecting the table whose data is to be restored, press the LOAD icon and the  
CNC shows a list with the tables that are already saved.  
To recover the table data, proceed as follows:  
1. Select the folder containing the file.  
2. Select the file from the list or write its name in the bottom window.  
CNC 8070  
3. Press [ENTER]torecallthedata from thefile or[ESC] to returntothe tablewithout  
recalling the data.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
8.5.3 Find text  
It is used to find text or a value in the table.  
To perform the search, press the FIND icon and the CNC will show a dialog box  
requesting the text or value to be searched. It is also possible to select whether the  
search must start at the beginning of the table or at the current cursor position.  
Find text  
8.  
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
It selects an option from a group.  
To start the search.  
To cancel the search and close the dialog box.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE  
9
Selecting the tool tables and magazine tables.  
The CNC tables may be accessed from any other operating mode, even while a  
program is in execution, by pressing the key for these tables.  
They may be divided into the following tables:  
• Tool table.  
• Active-tools table.  
• Table for the status of the tool change process.  
• Tool magazine tables.  
In order to load a tool in the magazine or in the spindle, that tool must have been  
previously defined in the corresponding table of the CNC.  
What can you do in this work mode?  
The following operations are possible in this work mode:  
• Editing and modifying the tool table  
• Display and manage the tool arrangement in the magazines and in the tool  
changing arms (if any).  
• Display the information about the tool change process; the operation carried out  
when executing an M06, manager status, change status (in execution or at rest),  
magazine involved in the change (if the change is taking place) and whether the  
change process is or not in an error state.  
• Load and unload a tool from the magazines through the spindle, using a  
maneuver.  
• Saving the table contents.  
• Recalling the table contents.  
• Printing the table contents.  
• Initializing the tables.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.1  
Showing tables and common operations  
9.1.1 Table selection  
This operating mode consists of several tables. The various tables may be selected  
using the horizontal softkeys.  
Softkey  
Table  
Tool table.  
9.  
This table defines the tools available and the data associated  
with each one of them. This table is common to all the  
magazines.  
Active-tools table.  
This table shows the tool that is active in each channel and the  
data associated with it.  
Change process.  
This table monitors the tool changes being executed in each  
channel.  
Tool magazine table (there is one table per magazine)  
For each magazine, it shows the tool distribution and the  
remaining life time of each tool (if tool life monitoring is active).  
If the magazine has a changer arm, it shows the tool located  
in it.  
The description of the magazine type can also be shown.  
The icon associated with this table depends on the software  
configuration (lathe or mill).  
When selecting one of these tables, it is displayed on the screen and the vertical icon  
menu shows the icons associated with that table. Later sections of this chapter show  
amoredetaileddescriptionoftheiconsand operationsthatmaybecarriedoutin each  
table.  
Pressing the key for the previous menu deselects the active table. When no table has  
been selected, the vertical icon menu may be used to save and restore all the tables.  
Simultaneous operations for all the tables  
If no table is currently selected, the vertical softkey menu will show the following  
softkeystosave or loadall the tables. See "9.1.3 Saveand load the tables" on page  
174.  
Save the tables  
Saves the data of all the tables.  
CNC 8070  
Recall the tables  
It restores the data previously saved for all the tables.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.1.2 Search for a text in the tables  
It is possible to search for a text or a value in the list of tools and magazine positions.  
The search is carried out from the vertical softkey menu.  
This icon starts the search. Once the icon has been pressed, the CNC will  
display a dialog box to define the search criteria. The defined criteria is  
maintained until a new one is defined.  
This icon is shown when a search criteria has been defined; it makes it  
possible to search for the next match using the current search criteria.  
9.  
To start or resume the search, press [ENTER] and the focus will position on the first  
match found. Every time one of the icons is pressed, it offers the option to search for  
the next match or to define a new search.  
The search may be canceled by pressing the [ESC] key.  
Define the search criteria.  
Every time one of these icons is pressed, it shows a dialog box to define the search  
criteria. The following may be defined in this dialog box:  
• The text or value to search for.  
• The beginning point of the search, namely either from the beginning of the table  
or from the cursor position.  
Find text  
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
It selects an option from a group.  
To start the search.  
To cancel the search and close the dialog box.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.1.3 Save and load the tables  
From the vertical softkey menu, it is possible to make a backup copy of the table data  
(recommended).Withthesefiles,itispossibletorecoverthetabledata whenneeded.  
These tables are saved in the an ASCII file. These files may be saved at the CNC,  
in a floppy disk or at another device (CNC, PC, etc.) connected through Ethernet. By  
default, they are saved in the folder "C:\CNC8070\ MTB\ DATA" or in the last folder  
selected by the user.  
These tables are saved in the following files. The table monitoring the change  
processes is informative only; it is not copied anywhere.  
9.  
Table  
File  
Tool table.  
Tools.TPT  
Toolsact.TPA  
Magazine.TPM  
Active-tools table.  
Tool magazine table (if there is only one magazine).  
Tool magazine table (if there are several magazines).  
Magazine1.TPM  
· · ·  
Magazine4.TPM  
Considerations for saving and loading tables.  
Although each table may be saved separately, it is recommended to always have a  
copy of all the tables. Also, the following must be borne in mind when loading the  
tables:  
• Loading the tool table initializes the magazine tables and the active-tools table.  
When changing the list of available tools, it may not be coherent with the tool  
distribution in the magazine or in the spindles. This is why after loading this table  
it is necessary to define (or load) the magazine tables and the active-tools table,  
if any, in that order.  
• Loadingthemagazine table initializestheactive-toolstable. Thisisbecausewhen  
loading the magazine tables, the new tool arrangement may not be coherent with  
the active tools. This is why after loading this table, it is necessary to load the  
active-tools table.  
Save the tables  
The tables may be saved one by one or all of them simultaneously. In either case,  
theactioniscarriedoutfromtheverticalsoftkeymenuusingoneofthefollowingicons.  
Saving all the tables at the same time.  
To save all the tables at the same time, no table must be selected. See  
"9.1.1 Table selection" on page 172.  
Saving each table separately.  
To save thetablesonebyone, selecteachtablefrom the horizontalsoftkey  
menu.  
CNC 8070  
After pressing the icon, the CNC will ask where to save the data files. Select the  
desired folder and press [ENTER]. The selection process may be canceled by  
pressing the [ESC] key.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Recall the tables  
It may be used to restore the data, in ASCII format, of the tables from the files. The  
tables may be loaded one by one or all of them simultaneously. In either case, the  
action is carried out from the vertical softkey menu using one of the following icons.  
Loading all the tables at the same time.  
To load all the tables at the same time, no table must be selected. See  
"9.1.1 Table selection" on page 172.  
9.  
Loading each table separately.  
To load the tables one by one, select each table from the horizontal softkey  
menu. To load the data of all the tables (recommended), follow a particular  
loading order to guarantee data consistency.  
After pressing the icon, the CNC will ask the location of the data files. Select the  
desired folder and press [ENTER]. The selection process may be canceled by  
pressing the [ESC] key.  
Order (sequence) to follow when loading the different tables.  
As mentioned earlier, there are two ways to load the table data from the ASCII files;  
loading all of them at the same time or selecting each table and loading its data.  
Loading all the tables at the same time.  
In this case, it is up to the CNC to set the order (sequence) used to load the data.  
Order (sequence) to follow when loading the tables one by one.  
This way, each table is selected and its data loaded. In this case, the following  
sequence must be followed when loading the tables.  
1. First load the tool table.  
This table defines the system tools. Loading the tool table initializes the tables of  
the magazines and the active-tools table.  
2. Second, load the tool magazine tables.  
Since the tool list has changed, if the magazine tables are not loaded, it is not  
possible to assure that the new tools are the ones located in the magazine tool  
or in the active-tools table.  
3. Finally, load the active-tools table.  
When loading the tables of magazines, it is unsure that the current tool positions  
will be compatible with the active tools.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.1.4 Printing the tables  
Some of the tables may be printed in a printer accessible from the CNC or as a file  
(PRN format). When the tables are saved as a file, it may be saved at the CNC, in  
a floppy disk or at any other device (CNC, PC, etc.) connected through Ethernet. By  
default, the files are saved in the folder "C:\CNC8070\ USERS\ Reports".  
In either case, the action is carried out from the vertical softkey menu using the  
following icon.  
This icon starts printing. When pressing this icon, the CNC will show a  
dialog box requesting the print destination for the table (printer or file).  
9.  
Print destination  
To select the print destination.  
To print the drawing.  
To cancel the printing.  
After selecting the target, press [ENTER] to start printing. Press [ESC] to cancel the  
selection.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.2  
Tool table  
This table defines the tools available and the data associated with each one of them.  
The tool list is common to the whole system, i.e. is common to all the available  
magazines. Once the tools have been defined, they may be distributed in the various  
magazines.  
The table is divided in two panels. To switch panels, press the panel-change key.  
9.  
The left panel shows the list of available tools. For each tool, it indicates the position  
and the magazine where it is located, whether it is a ground tool or the tool is active  
in a channel.  
The rightpanelshowsthedata of thetoolselected on the list. From the verticalsoftkey  
menu, it is possible to select the data shown on the right panel. See  
"9.2.3 Description of the tool data" on page 181.  
About the tools  
Each tool is identified by its number, that is unique for the whole system; it cannot  
be repeated in different magazines nor in ground tools. This table indicates the  
position and the magazine where each tool is located, whether it is a ground tool or  
the tool is active in a channel.  
Ground tools  
A ground toolis a tool that is not stored in any magazine and is loaded manually when  
requested. Ground tools are also defined in the tool table, but they are not associated  
with any magazine position.  
Ground tool loading and unloading is global to the system; it is not associated with  
any particular magazine or channel.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.2.1 Description of the icons of the vertical softkey menu  
The options of the vertical menuof softkeys depend on which table is active.  
The vertical softkey menu shows all the options for the selected table. The group of  
options shown on this menu may be expanded with the softkey associated with the  
"+" icon that offers a different set of options.  
The options shown for the tool table are. Bear in mind that the table is divided into  
two panels. There are options that are valid for both panels and options that are only  
available on one of them.  
9.  
Display units (millimeters/inches)  
It is used to change the units for data display. The change of units is only valid for  
display and dataentry. Forprogramming, theCNC assumes theunitssetbytheactive  
function G70 or G71.  
The icon highlights the units currently selected (millimeters or inches).  
Find text  
To search for a text on a toollist. See "9.1.2 Search for a text in the tables"on page  
173.  
Add tool  
(This icon is only available for the tool list).  
It adds a new tool to the list.  
Delete tool  
(This icon is only available for the tool list).  
It removes a tool from the list. A tool cannot be deleted if it is in the tool magazine.  
Delete data  
(This icon is only available for tool data).  
It deletes the data where the cursor is. When deleting a data, it assumes its default  
value.  
Configuring the tool table  
(This icon is only available for tool data).  
It is used to configure the data shown in the tool table.  
Initializing the table  
(The table can only be initialized when the CNC is "READY").  
It initializes the tool table. The CNC will request confirmation of the command.  
CNC 8070  
Initializing the tables eliminates all the tools from the list. It also initializes the active-  
tools table and the magazine tables because the available tools have been erased.  
Save table  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
It saves the table data in a file. See "9.1.3 Save and load the tables" on page 174.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Recall table  
It recalls the table data previously saved in a file. See "9.1.3 Save and load the  
tables" on page 174.  
Bear in mind that loading the tooltable initializes the magazine tables and the active-  
tools table.  
Print table  
It prints the contents of the table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a file  
(PRN format) at the CNC. See "9.1.4 Printing the tables" on page 176.  
9.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.2.2 The tool list  
The tool list appears on the left panel of the tool table. The list shows the available  
tools and their position. The CNC updates data of the list every time a tool change  
is carried out.  
Tool number  
It is assigned automatically when the tool is added to the list. It may be modified by  
the user in the data window.  
9.  
Tool name  
Name identifying the tool defined by the user in the data window. It may be edited  
directly on the list.  
Tool position  
It indicates the position of the tool, in a magazine, in the spindle or in the claws of  
the tool changer arm.  
C1-C4  
M1-M4  
It is in one of the spindles.  
It is in one of the magazines. In this case, it also indicates its  
magazine position.  
CH1-CH2  
It is in the holders of the tool changer arm.  
If none of these positions is indicated, it means that it is a ground tool. Ground tools  
are not stored in the magazine and are loaded manually when requested.  
How to move around on the tool list  
Keys to select a tool from the list  
To scroll list up and down line by line.  
To move the cursor page by page through the list.  
To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list.  
To access the data of the selected tool.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.2.3 Description of the tool data  
The tool data appears on the right panel of the tool table. It shows the data of the tool  
selected on the list.  
This data must be defined by the user. When using tool life monitoring, the CNC is  
in charge of updating the value of the actual (real) life.  
Configuring the tool data display  
The data being shown may be configured from the vertical softkey menu.  
9.  
Whenpressing thisicon, theCNC showsadialog boxforselectingthedata  
to be shown. To hide a data, cancel the relevant check box.  
Keys to set the tool table  
To move the cursor.  
To activate/deactivate the selection box.  
To accept the configuration defined.  
To cancel the defined configuration.  
Description of the tool data  
The tool data is grouped as follows:  
• Tool identification.  
• Tool geometry.  
• Tool monitoring.  
• Information for the magazine.  
• Custom.  
• Comment.  
Keys for selecting the table data  
It selects the previous and next data of the same group.  
It selects the first data of the previous or next group.  
Tool identification  
Information identifying the tool: number, name, family, number of tool offsets and  
status.  
Tool number  
It is assigned automatically when the tool is added to the list. This number may be  
changed if it is not in the magazine, in the spindle or on the tool changer arm.  
CNC 8070  
The tool number may be any integer between 1 and 999999999; by default, it is  
assigned the first available value on the list.  
When entering an existing tool number, the CNC displays the data for that tool.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Tool name  
Name identifying the tool. This data can also be defined on the tool list.  
The tool name may be up to 32-characters long.  
Tool family  
A tool family is a group of tools that share similar characteristics. This information is  
used when using an automatic tool changer so the CNC can replace the worn-out  
or rejected tool with a similar one.  
9.  
When requesting a new tool, the CNC checks whether it is worn out (real life greater  
than nominal life) or it has been rejected. If so, it selects the next tool in the table that  
belongs to the same family.  
The family or a tool may be any integer between 0 and 99999999. The ·0· family is  
the same as not having a family; i.e. the tools belonging to the ·0· family cannot be  
replaced with another one.  
Tool offsets  
Number of tool offsets. Each tool offset has different geometry and monitory data  
associated with it.  
A tool can have up to 8 offsets. When a tool has several offsets, their numbers must  
be correlative (non-skipping).  
Example of a milling tool with one offset (left) and two offsets (right).  
Tool status  
It indicates the tool status. The possible status are:  
Status  
Meaning  
Available  
Worn out  
Rejected  
The tool is available.  
The "real life" is greater than the "nominal life".  
The tool has been rejected by the PLC.  
When using tool life monitoring, the "worn-out" and "rejected" indicators are also set  
by the CNC when any of the previous cases occur.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Tool geometry  
This area shows the data about the tool type and its dimensions. The geometry data  
depends on the type of tool. The table only shows the data that makes sense for the  
selected tool.  
While defining the data, it shows various information graphics depending on the data  
being defined. On the other hand, the bottom of the screen shows the description of  
the data currently selected.  
The data related to the geometry may be accessed with the following hotkeys:  
9.  
Hotkey Access  
L
R
A
O
Length, length wear and edge length.  
Radius, radius wear, nose (tip)radius and nose (tip)radiuswear.  
Penetration angle  
Offsets on each axis.  
Offset selection  
The geometry data is associated with the tool offset. If the tool has been defined with  
several offsets, it shows the number of the offset whose data is displayed, and it also  
allows selecting the previous or next offset. To change offsets, place the focus on the  
buttons and press [SPACE].  
Offset number and selection of the previous or next offset. In  
this case, it will display the data of the second tool offset.  
Operation type and tool  
Regardless of the software installed, it is possible to define both milling and lathe  
tools. The tool is defined depending on the operation it can carry out. If it is not the  
right tool for any of the proposed operations, it must be assigned the operation  
"Others".  
Once the operation has been selected, the screen will show the available tools. It will  
show a help graphic with the selected tool type.  
The data to define the geometry of the tool will be relevant to the selected tool. It will  
only show the data that makes sense for the selected tool.  
Operation  
Tool type  
Milling  
(A) Flat endmill.  
(B) Toric endmill.  
(C) Ball endmill.  
(D) Disk endmill.  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(D)  
Reaming  
(A) Reamer.  
(A)  
Grooving/cutoff  
(A) Square.  
(A)  
(A)  
(A)  
CNC 8070  
Drilling  
(A) Drill bit.  
Boring  
(A) Quill.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Operation  
Tool type  
Turning  
(A) Diamond.  
(B) Square.  
(C) Round.  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
Surface milling  
(A) Surface  
endmill.  
milling  
(A)  
(A)  
9.  
Tapping  
(A) Cutter.  
(B) Tap.  
(B)  
Measuring probe  
Others  
To define the tools that do are not suitable for the  
proposed operations.  
Axis orientation in turning.  
It is defined with an icon that is only displayed when defining a turning (lathe) tool.  
The orientation of the axes is determined by the type of lathe (horizontal or vertical),  
the position of the turret and the spindle position (on the right or on the left).  
Location code or tool calibration point.  
It is defined with an icon that is only displayed when defining a turning (lathe) tool.  
The location code indicates which is the calibrated tool tip and, therefore, the point  
controlled by the CNC to apply radius compensation. The location code depends on  
the orientation of the machine axes.  
Tool-holder orientation.  
It is defined by an icon that is displayed in the following cases.  
• On a lathe model, for all the tools.  
• On a mill model, only for turning (lathe) tools.  
The orientation of the tool holder indicates whether it is a tool for horizontal or radial  
machining. For turning tools, the meaning of this icon depends on the orientation of  
the tool axes.  
Horizontal lathe. Radial machining.  
Vertical lathe. Longitudinal machining.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Machining direction.  
It is defined with an icon.  
It indicates the tool's machining direction.  
Icon  
Machining direction.  
Undefined direction.  
Right-hand machining direction.  
Left-hand machining direction.  
9.  
"L" - Tool length  
This data is only shown on tools that are not for turning.  
"R" - Tool radius  
This data is only shown on tools that are not for turning.  
L
Tool length.  
Tool radius.  
Cutting length.  
R
Lc  
"LW" - Length wear  
Tool length wear offset. This data is only shown on tools that are not for turning.  
The CNC will add this value to the nominal length to calculate the real tool length  
("Length" + "L wear").  
"RW" - Radius wear  
Tool radius wear offset. This data is only shown on tools that are not for turning.  
The CNC will add this value to the nominal radius to calculate the actual (real) tool  
radius ("Radius" + "R wear").  
A tool with a radius of 20mm and a length of 134mm has a radius wear of 0.2mm  
and a length wear of 0.15mm, the tool table should be set as follows:  
Radius = 20 mm. Wear R = -0.2 mm.  
Length = 134 mm. Wear L = -0.15 mm.  
The CNC assumes as real dimensions the following.  
Real radius => 20 + (-0.2) = 19.8mm.  
Real length => 134 + (-0.15) = 133.85 mm.  
"A" - Cutter angle  
This data is only shown for turning tools.  
CNC 8070  
"C" - Cutting angle  
This data is only shown for turning tools.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
"B" - Cutter width  
This data is only shown for turning tools.  
A
Cutter angle.  
Cutting angle.  
Cutter width.  
Cutting length.  
C
B
Lc  
9.  
"Rp" - Tool tip radius  
Tool tip radius.  
"RpW" - Tool tip radius wear  
Tool tip radius wear.  
The CNC will add this value to the nominal tool tip radius to calculate the actual (real)  
tool tip radius ("Rp" + "Rp wear").  
"Lc" - Cutting length  
Length of the cutting edge.  
"Ae" - Entry angle  
This data is only shown on tools that are not for turning.  
Penetration angle for pocket milling.  
Tool offsets  
On milling tools, it is used to define the tool position when using a tool holder or an  
intermediate tooling.  
On turning tools, it is used to define the tool length in each axis.  
Tool offset wear  
Tool offset distance.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Tool life monitoring  
This group shows the data related to tool life monitoring. If a tool has been defined  
with several offsets, it is possible to manage the status of each one.  
When managing the live of two or more offsets of the same tool, the list of the  
magazine positions (magazine table) only shows whether the tool has been rejected  
or not.  
Type  
It is used to activate and select the type of tool life monitoring (in time or number of  
operations).  
9.  
Nominal life  
Machining time (in minutes) or number of operations that the tool may carry out.  
Real (actual) life  
Machining time or number of operation the tool has carried out. The CNC updates  
this value when the tool is being used.  
Tool magazine  
This information cannot be modified if the tool is in the spindle, on the changer arm  
or in the magazine.  
Size  
Tool size. The size determines the number of positions (pockets) the tool occupies  
in the magazine.  
Size  
Magazine positions it occupies.  
Small  
It only occupies its position. It takes no extra position.  
It takes half of an additional position to the right and to the left.  
It takes a full additional position to the right and to the left.  
Medium  
Large  
Custom  
The user defines the number of additional positions the tool  
occupies to its right and to its left.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
A
B
B
A
(A) Small tool.  
(B) Large tool.  
CNC 8070  
Positions to the right / Positions to the left  
Space reserved in the magazine for the tool to the right and to the left of its position.  
This data can be defined when the tool size is "custom".  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Special  
The tool always occupies the same position in the magazine.  
Custom  
Data defined by the manufacturer.  
Data 1 / Data 2  
These data show, in numerical format, the information selected by the manufacturer.  
9.  
Data 3 / Data 4  
These data show, in binary format, the information selected by the manufacturer.  
Comment  
Comment associated with the tool.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.3  
Operations with the tool table  
9.3.1 Editing the tool table  
Initialize table  
The table can only be initialized when the CNC is "READY". The table is initialized  
from the vertical softkey menu.  
9.  
When resetting the table, all the tools are deleted from the list, including  
those in the spindle and on the tool changer arm. It also initializes the  
active-tools table and the magazine tables because the available tools  
have been erased.  
Adding/removing a tool to/from the list  
A toolmaybe addedordeleted onlywhenitisselected on the toollist. Bothoperations  
are carried out from the vertical softkey menu.  
Add a tool to the list.  
It adds a new tool to the list. The tool is added to the list at the first free  
position.  
Remove a tool from the list.  
It removes a tool from the list. A tool cannot be removed if it is in the  
magazine, in the spindle or on the tool changer arm.  
Data editing  
Proceed as follows to fill out the tool table data:  
1. Select the tool to be set from the list and press [ENTER] to access its data.  
2. Configure the table to show only the data that may be defined hiding the rest.  
3. Define the tool data. Every time a new value is defined, press [ENTER] to validate  
it.  
4. Make a safety backup copy of the tool data out to a file.  
Keys for tool table editing  
To move the cursor through the table data.  
To validate the new value.  
To activate/deactivate the selection boxes and open/close drop  
lists.  
To move the cursor whitin a data.  
CNC 8070  
To select the line before or after the comment.  
To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the comment line.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.4  
Active-tools table  
This table shows the list of available tools and which one is active in each channel.  
The table is divided in two panels. To switch panels, press the panel-change key.  
9.  
B
A
C
(A) Tool listing.  
(B) Active tools.  
(C) Tool selected on the list.  
The left panel shows the list of the available tools and the right panel shows the data  
of the active tool in each channel.  
Tool listing  
For each tool, it indicates the position and the magazine where it is located, whether  
it is a ground tool or the tool is active in a channel. The CNC updates data of the list  
every time a tool change is carried out.  
Itisthe same listthat appears in the tooltable. See "9.2.2 The tool list" on page 180.  
Active tools  
It shows the data of the active tool in each channel and also the data of the tool  
selected on the list. It is also possible to change the tool of the spindle. See  
"9.4.1 Changing the tool of the spindle" on page 191.  
The tool data cannot be edited on this screen. The data shown here is defined in the  
tool table.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.4.1 Changing the tool of the spindle  
It is possible to change the tool of the spindles from the active tools panel. The tool  
to be placed must be defined in the tool table.  
To change the active tool, follow these steps.  
1. Use the cursor to select the active tool to be modified and enter the number of  
the new tool.  
2. Press the [CYCLE START] key to load the tool automatically or the [ENTER] key  
to update the positions list after a manual tool change.  
9.  
3. The tool list will show that the tool is in the spindle.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.5  
Table for the status of the tool change process  
This screen monitors the tool changes being executed in each channel.  
9.  
It indicates the following for each tool change process:  
• The type of change selected and the magazine involved.  
The type ofchange refers to the type ofoperation being carried outortobe carried  
out when executing function M06. The possible types of change are load a tool  
into the spindle or load and unload a ground tool from the magazine through the  
spindle.  
• The "execution " LED informs that the tool change process is running and that  
the magazine is carrying out an operation.  
• The "status" LED informs on whether the magazine is in an error state or not. To  
eliminate the error condition, press the reset softkey in the magazine table.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.6  
Magazine table  
Up to four different magazines may be configured. Each magazine has a table  
showing the tool distribution in the magazine and which table is in the spindle and  
on each holder of the changer arm (if any).  
The CNC updates the table data every time a tool is changed.  
9.  
B
A
(A) Magazine positions.  
(B) Magazine information.  
The table is divided in two panels.  
The left panel shows the list of magazine positions. For each position, it indicates  
whether it is free, disabled or has a tool. For each tool, it shows the remaining life time  
(when using tool life monitoring) and the family it belongs to.  
The right panel is informative only; it cannot be selected. This panel shows  
information about the magazine status, about the tools in the tool changer arm and  
about the tool selected on the list. Optionally, it may show information on the type and  
configuration of the magazine.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.6.1 Description of the icons of the vertical softkey menu  
The options of the vertical menuof softkeys depend on which table is active.  
The vertical softkey menu shows all the options for the selected table. The group of  
options shown on this menu may be expanded with the softkey associated with the  
"+" icon that offers a different set of options.  
The options shown for the tool table are.  
Load / unload a tool to / from the tool changer arm  
(This icon is only available in magazines with tool changer arm).  
9.  
It may be used to load and download a tool into the changer arm. See "9.7.2 Load  
/ unload a tool to / from the tool changer arm" on page 201.  
Find text  
To search for a text on a toollist. See "9.1.2 Search for a text in the tables"on page  
173.  
Loading a tool into the magazine  
The tool may be loaded into the magazine in two ways.  
• Automatic loading (pressing [START]). A tool previously defined in the table is  
loaded into the magazine. It is loaded from ground through the spindle.  
• Manual loading (pressing [ENTER]). It assumes that the tool defined in the table  
has already been manually loaded into the magazine. It updates the magazine  
list.  
See "9.7.1 Loading / unloading tools to / from the magazine" on page 199.  
Unloading the tool from the magazine  
The tool may be unloaded into the magazine in two ways.  
• Automatic unload (pressing [START]). A tool defined in the table is unloaded from  
the magazine. It is unloaded to ground through the spindle.  
• Manual loading (pressing [ENTER]). It assumes that the tool defined in the table  
has already been manually loaded from the magazine. It updates the magazine  
list.  
See "9.7.1 Loading / unloading tools to / from the magazine" on page 199.  
Initializing the table  
(The table can only be initialized when the CNC is "READY").  
Initialize (reset) the magazine table. The CNC will request confirmation of the  
command.  
Initializing the tables eliminates all the tools from the list. It also initializes the active-  
tools table because the tool arrangement in the magazine may have changed.  
CNC 8070  
Save table  
It saves the table data in a file. See "9.1.3 Save and load the tables" on page 174.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Recall table  
It recalls the table data previously saved in a file. See "9.1.3 Save and load the  
tables" on page 174.  
Bear in mind that loading the magazine tool initializes the active-tools table.  
Print table  
It prints the contents of the table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a file  
(PRN format) at the CNC. See "9.1.4 Printing the tables" on page 176.  
9.  
Enabling and disabling a magazine position  
It enables or disables the magazine position selected with the cursor.  
Resetting the magazine  
It eliminates the error status of the tool manager. This icon is only available when  
an error occurs at the tool manager.  
Magazine information  
It shows or hides the magazine data.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.6.2 List of magazine positions  
The list of magazine positions appears on the left panel of the tool magazine table.  
For each position, it indicates whether it is free, disabled or has a tool. For each tool,  
it shows the remaining life time (when using tool life monitoring) and the family it  
belongs to.  
Magazine position  
The status of a position is indicated with a symbol next to the position number.  
• The position is free (white filled circle).  
9.  
• The position is semi-free (black-and-white filled circle).  
• The position is occupied (black filled circle).  
• The position is disabled (red filled circle).  
Tool number  
Number of the tool occupying the magazine position.  
Remaining life  
If the tool life monitoring is active, shows the remaining life, either in machining time  
orin thenumberofoperationstobecarriedoutorthetoolstatus(rejectedorwornout).  
Tool family  
Family the tool belongs to, defined by the user in the tool table.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.6.3 Magazine information  
The right panel shows different information about the status of the tool magazine and  
the tool changer arm. This information is grouped as follows:  
A
9.  
B
C
D
(A) Magazine status.  
(B) Tool in the claws of the changer arm.  
(C) Tool selected on the list.  
(D) Magazine data.  
Magazine status  
This area shows the operation being carried out in the magazine.  
In standby:  
Loading:  
The magazine is in standby.  
A tool is being loaded into the magazine.  
A tool is being unloaded from the magazine.  
Unloading:  
The "Status" led informs the user whether the magazine is in an error state or not.  
To eliminate the error condition, press the reset softkey in the magazine table.  
Change status  
If the magazine is involved in a tool change at a given time, it shows the information  
about the status of that change; the operation is carried out when executing an M06,  
managerstatus(in executionoratrest)andthestatusofthechange process(whether  
it is in error or not).  
Tools in the changer arm  
This area shows which are the tools that occupy each claw (holder) of the changer.  
It shows the number and size of each tool.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Tool information  
Itshowsthe datarelatedtothe magazine ofthetoolselectedfrom thelist. The"status"  
led informs about the tool status.  
Green  
Yellow  
Red  
The tool is available.  
The tool life is about to expire.  
The tool is expired (worn out) or has been rejected by the PLC.  
Magazine data  
9.  
Description of the type of magazine.  
To show and hide this information, press the information softkey.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.7  
Operations with the magazine table  
9.7.1 Loading / unloading tools to / from the magazine  
The tools may be loaded and unloaded to/from the magazine manually or  
automatically. When done manually, the positions list must be updated.  
Manual load/unload  
The operator places the tools directly in the magazine without using the CNC. Then,  
the positions list must be updated.  
9.  
Automatic load/unload  
The operator places the tools in the spindle and the CNC places the tool in the  
magazine. The positions list is updated automatically.  
Initialize table  
The table can only be initialized when the CNC is "READY". The table is initialized  
from the vertical softkey menu.  
Initializing the table eliminates all the data about the position of the tools  
in the magazine. It also initializes the active-tools table because the tool  
arrangement in the magazine has been changed.  
Loading a tool  
The tool is loaded into the magazine using the vertical softkey menu. Only the tools  
defined in the tool table may be loaded into the magazine and they must be defined  
as ground tools. In other words, they must not be in any position of the magazine,  
of the spindle or in the claws of the tool changer.  
Even if the magazines are configured for not admitting ground tools while  
machining, they may be loaded into the magazine through this maneuver.  
i
Depending on tool size, when it is loaded into the magazine, it may affect several  
positions.  
Magazine management using the "Load tool" softkey.  
This type of management is valid for loading tools both automatically and manually.  
After pressing the softkey, the user is asked what kind of loading to do.  
1. Press the softkey associated with tool loading.  
2. Enter the tool number and the magazine position to insert it. By default, it offers  
the position selected on the list with the cursor.  
3. Press the [CYCLE START] key to load the tool automatically by means of the  
spindle or the [ENTER] key to update the positions list after loading manually.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Magazine management using the positions list.  
This type of management is only valid for loading tools manually. It lets update the  
list of positions after having placed the tools directly in the magazine, without using  
the CNC.  
1. Select a magazine position from the list and enter the number of the tool it  
occupies it.  
2. Press [ENTER] to update the positions list.  
9.  
Unloading a tool  
The tool is unloaded into the magazine using the vertical softkey menu. After  
unloading a tool from the magazine, it becomes a ground tool.  
Magazine management using the "Unload tool" softkey.  
Thistype ofmanagementis valid forunloading toolsboth automaticallyand manually.  
After pressing the softkey, the user is asked what kind of loading to do.  
1. Press the softkey associated with tool unloading.  
2. Enter the number of the tool to be unloaded.  
3. Press the [CYCLE START] key to unload the tool automatically to the spindle or  
the [ENTER] key to update the positions list after unloading manually.  
Magazine management using the positions list.  
This type of management is only valid for unloading tools manually. It lets update the  
list of positions after having removed the tools directly from the magazine, without  
using the CNC.  
1. Select a magazine position from the list and delete the number of the tool it  
occupies it.  
2. Press [ENTER] to update the positions list.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.7.2 Load / unload a tool to / from the tool changer arm  
A tool is loaded/unloaded to/from the claws (holders) of the changer arm using the  
vertical softkey menu. To insert a tool in the holders of the changer arm (when  
available), it must be placed in the magazine. Ground tools cannot be placed in the  
claws (holders) of the tool changer arm.  
Nor can the tools that are in the holders of the tool changer arm be inserted in the  
spindle.  
9.  
To load or unload one of these tools:  
1. Press the softkey associated with the operations with the changer arm.  
2. Define the tool number in the positions of the tool changer arm.  
When using a two-holder changer arm, there may not be tools in the spindle and  
in the second holder of the changer arm at the same time.  
3. Press [ENTER] to update the table.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
9.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UTILITIES MODE  
10  
Utilities mode selection  
The utilities mode may be accessed from any other operating mode, even while a  
program is in execution, by pressing the relevant key.  
Operations in this work mode  
This workmode showsthe files that may be accessed from the CNC andmay be used  
for the following operations:  
• See the files stored at the CNC, in a floppy disk or at another CNC (or PC)  
connected via Ethernet.  
• Create new folders to save files.  
• Select a file group and carry out operations such as copy, rename or delete files.  
• Change file attributes.  
• Do a file search based on a text already defined in them.  
• Set a password to restrict the access to the customizing tool FGUIM, to machine  
parameters and to the PLC.  
• Make or restore a backup copy of the CNC data.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
10.1 Appearance of the utilities mode  
When this operating mode is active, it will be indicated at the top right side of the  
general status bar. This mode only has one screen.  
Standard configuration  
The standard configuration of this work mode, described in this manual corresponds  
to the one supplied by Fagor. In some cases, the manual shows a sample screen,  
instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand.  
10.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
10.1.1 Screen description  
The utilities mode screen shows the following information:  
A
B
10.  
A. Folder tree.  
It may show the folders of the CNC, of a floppy disk or another CNC (or PC)  
connected via Ethernet.  
B. List of files saved in the selected folder.  
To switch windows, press the relevant key.  
Softkey menu  
When selecting the utilities mode, the horizontal softkey menu will show the options  
related to this work mode.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
10.1.2 Window description  
Folder tree  
This window shows the folders that may be accessed from the CNC, as well their  
structure. Besides the CNC folders, it may show thoseof afloppy disk or another CNC  
(or PC) connected via Ethernet.  
The folders may contain files and other folders.  
10.  
Icon  
Description  
It contains no folders.  
It contains no folders and they are not shown here.  
It contains folders and they are shown here.  
The folder has been selected.  
To select a folder from the list:  
• Move the cursor with the relevant keys.  
• Using the alphanumeric keyboard, pressing a key will select the first element  
starting with that letter. Pressing it again will select the second one and so on.  
Keys to select a folder  
To switch windows (folders or files).  
To close and open a folder submenu.  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To move the cursor page by page.  
To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list.  
When selecting a folder, the CNC shows a list of the files it contains (See the  
"10.2.2 Options" section of this chapter). Likewise, the bottom of the window will  
show the number of files contained in the folder and the totalsize (bytes) they amount  
to.  
List of files  
Thiswindow shows the files stored in the selected folder. Any ofthem may be deleted,  
renamed, its protections changed and copied within the same device (CNC, PC,  
floppy disk) or between two different devices.  
This window offers the following information:  
• The file name.  
• The file size, in bytes.  
• The time and date when the file was edited last.  
• The attributes of the file.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Attributes. Modifiable and hidden files  
Only the letters of the attributes currently selected will be shown. Those not selected  
will appear as "_" .  
H
The fileis hidden and itwillnotappearwhenselecting aprogramforediting  
or execution.  
Remember that a hidden file can still be deleted if its name is known. To  
prevent that (if so wished) its "modifiable" attribute should be removed.  
M
The file may be modified; in other words, edited, copied, deleted, etc.  
10.  
Select files from the list  
To copy, rename, delete, etc. the files must be previously selected on the list. A file  
may be selected from the list:  
• Move the cursor with the relevant keys.  
• Using the alphanumeric keyboard, pressing a key will select the first element  
starting with that letter. Pressing it again will select the second one and so on.  
• Using the "file search" option of the softkey menu permits looking for all the files  
that contain the indicated text.  
Keys to select a folder  
To switch windows (folders or files).  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To move the cursor page by page.  
To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list.  
To select a group of files, keep the [SHIFT] key pressed while the moving the cursor.  
To add or remove a file from the selection, keep the [CTRL] key pressed and place  
the cursor on the file and press [SPACE] key.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
10.1.3 Vertical softkey menu (icons)  
The icon menu always shows all the icons related to the Utilities mode. The  
group of icons of this menu may be expanded with the softkey associated with  
the "+" icon that offers a new set of icons.  
10.  
List of icons  
Cut  
Copies the selected files on the clipboard. After pasting the content of the clipboard,  
the files are deleted from the folder.  
(This icon is only available when there is a file selected).  
Copy  
Copies the selected files on the clipboard.  
(This icon is only available when there is a file selected).  
Paste  
Pastes the files from the clipboard into the selected folder. If the files were placed  
using the "Cut" option, they will be removed from their original location.  
The contents of the clipboard are not eliminated after "pasting". Therefore, this  
pasting operation may be repeated as often as you wish.  
Rename  
It is used to change the name of the folder or file currently selected.  
• When renaming a folder, if there is one already with the new name, the proposed  
name change will be ignored and the folder will keep its original name.  
• If when renaming a file, there is a previous file with the same name in the folder,  
the new file replaces the previous one.  
Modifiable file  
Itisusedto changethe"modifiable"attribute ofthe selectedfiles. Thisattributeallows  
protecting the files so they cannot be modified in the editing mode.  
The attributes column shows the letter -M- indicating that the program may be  
modified.  
When a program is NOT modifiable, its contents may be viewed; but cannot be  
modified.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Hidden file  
It is used to changed the "hidden" attribute of the selected files. This attribute allows  
protecting the files so they are not displayed when selecting a program to be edited  
or executed.  
The attributes column shows the letter -H- indicating that the program will be hidden  
(not visible).  
However, a hidden program may be deleted if its number is known; therefore, it is  
recommended to remove the modifiable attribute (M) in order to avoid deleting it.  
10.  
Remove file  
It is used for deleting the selected folder or files.  
To delete the files, the CNC will show a dialog box requesting confirmation of the  
command whereas the empty folders will be deleted directly without requesting  
confirmation.  
The folders can only be deleted if they are empty.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
10.2 Utilities (Softkeys)  
10.2.1 Sorted by  
It is used to order the list of files.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the different ordering options.  
To return to the previous menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
The file list may be ordered alphabetically, by size, by data or by type. When pressing  
the same ordering criteria twice, the CNC toggles from ascending to descending and  
vice versa.  
10.  
The softkey menu shows the ordering criteria currently selected (the softkey will  
appear pressed).  
10.2.2 Options  
It is used to personalize how the program listing will be displayed on the screen.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the following personalizing  
options. To return to the previous menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Update  
It updates the list of files showing the files of the folder currently selected. Only when  
the "auto-update" option is not active.  
Auto-update  
When this option is selected (the softkey will appear pressed), every time a folder is  
selected, the CNC will automatically update the list of files.  
Column adjust  
When this option is selected (the softkey will appear pressed), the columns of the file  
lists will adjust to the text they contain so as to show the text that may be truncated  
because it is too long.  
Reset all  
It closes the folder tree (layout) and it only shows the devices (floppy disk, Ethernet  
network, etc. ) connected to the CNC.  
Show hidden files  
When this option is selected (the softkey will appear pressed), the file list shows all  
the files of the selected folder even those having the "hidden" attributes. Otherwise,  
these files will not be shown.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
10.2.3 Search in files  
It is used to search files. When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box  
where the following data may be defined:  
Find in file  
A
B
10.  
C
D
E
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
To activate/deactivate the selection box (C).  
To start or cancel the defined search.  
A. Description of the files to be searched. The "*" and "?" wild characters may be  
used on the search, meaning:  
*
Any character string.  
Any character.  
?
In such a way that:  
*
Looks for all the files.  
*.NC  
exa*.*  
Looks for all the files having the extension "NC".  
Looks for all the files beginning with "exa".  
B. Text included within the files.  
C. Defines the search criteria.  
• Look in the sub-folders.  
• Ignore uppercase and lowercase.  
• Consider the text to find as a whole word.  
D. Start the defined search.  
E. Cancel the defined search.  
After defining the search options, place the cursor on one of the lower buttons to  
accept (D) or cancel (E) the defined search and press [ENTER].  
The file window will show the list of the programs found.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
10.2.4 Select all  
It selects all the files of the list. The selection will be canceled by moving the cursor.  
To add or remove a file from the selection, keep the [CTRL] key pressed and place  
the cursor on the file and press [SPACE] key.  
Keys to select a folder  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
10.  
To move the cursor page by page.  
To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list.  
Having selected a group of files, they may be deleted, copied, cut or their attributes  
may be changed by pressing the relevant icon.  
10.2.5 Invert selection  
It inverts the file selection made selecting the files that appeared unselected and vice  
versa.  
To add or remove a file from the selection, keep the [CTRL] key pressed and place  
the cursor on the file and press [SPACE] key.  
Keys to select a folder  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To move the cursor page by page.  
To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list.  
Having selected a group of files, they may be deleted, copied, cut or their attributes  
may be changed by pressing the relevant icon.  
10.2.6 New folder  
It is used to create a new folder to store files.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the file name.  
Write the new name and select one of the buttons to accept it or ignore it.  
Keys to select a folder  
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
To confirm the option selected with the cursor.  
If when defining the folder name, there is already a folder with the same name, it will  
NOT create the new folder.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
10.2.7 Protection passwords  
The passwords may be used to define each of the codes that the user will have to  
enter in order to access certain CNC functions. If entered correctly, it stores it and  
it does not request it again unless the CNC is turned off. If the password is wrong,  
the requested action cannot be carried out and it requests it again every time.  
Press the "Passwords" softkey to access the password setting screen. The following  
passwords may be defined.  
• General password.  
• PLC.  
10.  
• Machine parameters.  
• Customizing.  
• Machine parameters for kinetics.  
General password  
It is requested when trying to access this password setting screen.  
PLC  
It is requested when trying to carry out the following actions at the PLC:  
• Editing the PLC program. When entering the wrong password, the PLC program  
opens as read-only.  
• Adding a file to the project.  
• Deleting a file.  
• Renaming a file.  
• Editing PLC messages. When entering the wrong password, the PLC messages  
may be neither displayed nor edited.  
• Generate PLC.  
• When accessing to the "Commands" service options.  
• In monitoring, when modifying the status of a resource.  
Machine parameters  
Itis requested when trying to carry out the following actions in the machine parameter  
table:  
• Modifying the value of a parameter.  
• Initialize a table.  
• Loading a table.  
Customizing  
CNC 8070  
It is requested when entering the FGUIM application. When entering the wrong  
password, it will not be possible to access the application.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Machine parameters for kinetics  
It is requested when trying to carry outthe following actions in the machine parameter  
tables for the kinematics: If not set, it will apply the password used in the rest of the  
machine parameters.  
• Modifying the value of a parameter.  
• Initialize a table.  
• Loading a table.  
10.  
How to set the protection passwords  
Press the "Passwords" softkey to access the password setting screen. From this  
screen, it is possible to define, modify or delete the passwords. If this screen is  
protected, pressing the softkey will request the general password.  
Each password may be up to 10 ASCII characters long. It is case sensitive.  
Keys to set the password  
To select the previous or next password.  
It assumes the defined password.  
To cancel the defined password.  
It deletes the selected password.  
The "Delete all" softkey deletes all the passwords defined.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
10.2.8 Data safety backup. Backup - Restore  
This option may be used to make a backup copy of the data of the MTB folder in order  
to be able to restore this configuration later on if necessary. The backup is saved in  
a single file.  
Both the folder being backed up and the file name it is saved in may be configured.  
When not indicated otherwise, it makes a backup of the "MTB" folder and it saves  
it in the mtb.r file in unit –A:–.  
10.  
Configuring backup options  
The backup options may be defined using the "Backup options" softkey. As backup  
options, it is possible to define both the folder being backed up and the name of the  
file containing the data. By default, it makes a backup of the "MTB" folder and it saves  
it in the mtb.r file in unit –A:–.  
The CNC saves the defined options in a file called backup.ini. If this file does not exist  
when making or restoring a backup, the default values will be used.  
Making a data backup  
The backup is made using the "automatic backup" softkey. Pressing this softkey  
makes a safety copy of the data of the indicated folder. The data is saved in the  
selected file.  
When not indicated otherwise or if the backup.ini file does not exist, it will make a  
backup of the "MTB" folder and will save it in the mtb.r file in unit –A:–  
Restoring data from a backup file  
Backup data is restored using the "Restore backup" softkey. Pressing this key copes  
the data from the indicated file to its original folder; i. E. To the folder that was backed  
up. If this folder does not exist, it creates it and goes on with the operation.  
If the files being restored already exist, they will be overwritten; i.e. the ones in the  
folder will be replaced by the ones in the backup.  
The name of the file from which the backup is restored is defined in the backup.ini  
file. If this file does not exist, it proceeds as follows:  
1. It looks for the mtb.r file in unit –A:– and it restores it.  
2. If this file does not exist, it restores the first backup file (extension –r–) of unit –A:–  
3. If there is no backup file, it shows the relevant error message.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
10.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PLC  
11  
In this operating mode, the PLC may be accessed to check its operation or the status  
of the different PLC variables. It is also possible to edit and analyze the PLC program  
as well as the message and error files of the PLC.  
MDI mode selection  
The PLC mode may be accessed either using the user key customized for it or from  
the tasks window. The task window may be accessed with key combination  
[CTRL]+[A].  
What can you do in this work mode?  
In short, the PLC mode offers the following operations:  
• Edit, modify or view the contents of the PLC project.  
• DebugthePLCprogrambyexecutingthedifferentpartsoftheprogramseparately  
(first cycle, main module, periodic module).  
• Analyze the behavior of the logic signals of the PLC program depending on a time  
base and triggering conditions set by the user.  
• Monitor the status of PLC resources and variables.  
• See all the resources used in the PLC project and in which program of the project  
they are being used.  
• Run statistics on execution times of the PLC project and of the modules that form  
it.  
• Edit, modifyor view the texts associatedwith the messagesand errorsof the PLC.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.1 Appearance of the PLC mode  
When this operating mode is active, it will be indicated at the top right side of the  
general status bar.  
This operating mode may be displayed with several screens. Each of them  
correspondsto aPLC service. The exchangebetweenthedifferentservicesiscarried  
out with the list of services.  
The different services overlap each other. If several services active, it is possible to  
switch from one to another using the relevant key, if it has been set accordingly. The  
services are switched in a rotary manner, in such a way that when pressing on the  
last active service, it shows the first one.  
11.  
Standard configuration  
The standard configuration of this work mode, described in this manual corresponds  
to the one supplied by Fagor. In some cases, the manual shows a sample screen,  
instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.1.1 Screen description  
The PLC mode screen shows the following information.  
A
B
11.  
C
D
A. Service window.  
It shows a list of the services available in the PLC environment.  
B. Data window.  
It shows the screen associated with the selected service, if any. The screens of  
the different services overlap each other. If several services active, it is possible  
to switch from one to another using the change key, if it has been set accordingly.  
To close a screen, press [ESC].  
C. It shows the PLC status, running or stopped.  
D. CNC messages.  
To switch windows, press the relevant key.  
Keys for selecting a service  
To close and open the file list of a service.  
To move the cursor thru the services of the window.  
To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list.  
To acces the service selected with the cursor.  
Softkey menu  
When selecting the PLC mode, the horizontal softkey menu will show the options  
associated with the PLC service currently selected. The set of options offered by this  
menu may be changed using the "+" softkey which offers a new set of options.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.1.2 Icon description (vertical softkeys)  
The icon menu always shows all the icons associated with the active PLC service.  
The icons are activated with their associated softkey (F8 to F12).  
List of icons  
11.  
Show/hide the service window  
Ittogglesbetweenthe shared usageofthe areaofthe PLCenvironment(thatdisplays  
both the service window and the data window) and the full work screen (hiding the  
service window so the data window is expanded covering the whole area of the PLC  
environment).  
Find text  
It is used for searching a text in all the files of the project. The result will be shown  
at the "Outputs" service.  
Go to file  
(It only appears when working with the "Outputs" or "Cross references" service).  
If the cursor is positioned on the result of a text search, a compiling error or a PLC  
resource, after selecting this option, it opens the corresponding file and the cursor  
goes to the line it refers to.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.2 "Programs" service  
This service is used for managing the PLC project and its files. The PLC project may  
consist of several files edited in any of the following languages:  
• Equations or mnemonics (extension *.PLC).  
• C language (extension *.C).  
PLC project  
11.  
Files making up the PLC project  
Selecting the PLC project, it shows or hides the list of its files.  
PLC project  
The PLC project is a set of files that, once compiled, generate the PLC program.  
When selecting the PLC project, the softkey menu will show the options to manage  
that project. Among these options, it is possible to add files to the PLC project and  
compile it.  
Files of the PLC project  
As mentioned earlier, the PLC project may consist of one or several files edited in  
one of the following languages:  
• Equations or mnemonics.  
• C language.  
One of the files of the PLC project may be edited in mnemonic languages (extension  
*.PLC). The rest must be edited in "C" language (extension *.C).  
When selecting a file, the softkey menu shows the options to manage that file. Among  
these options, it is possible to edit and monitor the file. These options will show the  
editing and monitoring screens.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.2.1 PLC project (softkeys)  
Theseoptionsare usedtocreatea PLC projectand compileittocreatetheexecutable  
PLC program.  
PLC project "Add file"  
It is used to add a file to the PLC project. This file may be a new one or an existing  
one. When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of the available files.  
Keys for selecting a service  
11.  
To switch windows.  
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
To add the selected file.  
To cancel the selection and close the program listing.  
To add a file to the PLC project.  
1. Select the file from the list or write its name in the bottom window.  
2. Press [ENTER] to accept the selection and add the file or [ESC] to cancel the  
selection and close the file listing.  
When accepting the selection, the selected file will appear on the list that make up  
the PLC project.  
PLC project "Generate PLC"  
It compiles and loads the PLC program based on the files that make up the PLC  
project. If an error occurs during compilation, the program will not be generated and  
the CNC will display a list of the detected errors.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.2.2 Files of the PLC project PLC (Softkey)  
When selecting a program of the PLC project at the service window, the softkey menu  
will offers the following options.  
Files of the PLC project "Edit"  
It is used to edit the selected PLC file.  
Selecting this option access the editing window (section on "11.3 Program editing"  
in this chapter).  
11.  
Files of the PLC project "Monitoring"  
It is used to monitor the selected PLC file.  
Selecting this option access the monitoring window (section on "11.5 Program  
monitoring" in this chapter).  
Files of the PLC project "Eliminate"  
It deletes the selected file of the PLC project (the file will still be available in the CNC's  
hard disk).  
Files of the PLC project "Rename"  
It is used to change the name of the selected file.  
Files of the PLC project "Copy"  
It is used to make a copy of the selected file.  
When selectingthisoption, theCNC showsalistwiththeprogramsstoredattheCNC.  
Keys for selecting a service  
To switch windows.  
To close and open a folder submenu.  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To save the new program.  
To cancel the selection and close the programs listing.  
To make a copy of the file:  
1. Select the destination folder for the copy.  
2. Define the filename atthe bottom window. To replace an existing file, selectit from  
the list.  
3. Press [ENTER] to copy the file or [ESC] to cancel the selection and close the file  
listing.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.3 Program editing  
To edit a program, select it at the service window and select the "Edit" option of the  
softkey menu. The CNC will access the program editor and will show the contents  
of the selected program.  
To close the edit window, press [ESC].  
Editor description  
11.  
The editing window shows the following information:  
A
B
C
A. Title bar.  
Name of the program selected for editing. An "*" next to the program name means  
that the changes made to the program have not been saved (the program must  
be saved so they do not get lost).  
B. Edit area.  
Program editing area showing its contents.  
C. Status bar.  
Information about cursor position and the status of the editor options such as:  
CAP  
OVR  
NUM  
Capital letters. When active, the text is always written in capital  
letters.  
Overwrite text. It toggles between overwriting and inserting text.  
When active, it overwrites the existing text.  
Numeric keypad active.  
Softkey menu  
When accessing the PLC program editor, the horizontal softkey menu will show all  
the options associated with editing a file.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.4 Program editing (softkeys)  
11.4.1 Analyze  
It analyzes the program searching for errors. The errors found will be displayed in the  
"Outputs" service window.  
To close this window and return to the editor, press [ESC]. To return to the editor  
without closing the window, press the screen switching key.  
11.  
11.4.2 File  
It is used to restore, save, import or print a file.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To return  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
File "Restore original"  
This option will only be available when the "auto-save" option is active (the section  
on "11.4.6 Customizing" in this chapter).  
It is used to recover the original file without the changes made since the last time it  
was opened. When selecting this option, the CNC requests confirmation of the  
command.  
File "Save"  
This option will only be available when the "manual-save" option is active (the section  
on "11.4.6 Customizing" in this chapter).  
It is used for saving the file that is being edited.  
File "Save as"  
It is used to save the file, that is being edited, with a different name. After saving the  
file, one keeps editing the new file.  
File "Include program"  
It is used to import the contents of a file saved at the CNC into the program that is  
being edited.  
File "Print"  
It is used to print the file, that is being edited, out to a printer connected to the CNC.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.4.3 Undo  
To "undo" the last modifications made. The modifications are undone one by one  
starting from the most recent one.  
11.4.4 Operations with blocks  
It is used to copy, cut and paste the information of a block or set of blocks and export  
this information as an independent program.  
11.  
This option is only available when there is a text selected in the program or on the  
clipboard. To select a text in the program, keep the [SHIFT] key pressed while moving  
the cursor.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To return  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Operations with blocks "Copy"  
It copies the selected text onto the clipboard.  
Operations with blocks "Cut"  
Copies the selected text onto the clipboard and deletes it from the program.  
Operations with blocks "Paste"  
Pastes the contents of the clipboard into the program.  
Operations with blocks "Copy to program"  
Saves the selected texts as an independent program.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of the available programs. To save  
the text as a program:  
1. Select the destination folder.  
2. Define the filename atthe bottom window. To replace anexisting file, selectitfrom  
the list.  
3. Press [ENTER] to save the program or [ESC] to cancel the selection and close  
the program listing.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.4.5 Find/Replace  
It is used for searching for a line or a text in a program. It can also replace a text with  
another text.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the line number  
orthetexttolook for. Whendefining atextsearch,certain optionsmayalso be defining  
that allow:  
A. Replacing the text being searched with another in the program.  
B. Ignore uppercase and lowercase.  
11.  
C. Consider the text to find as a whole word.  
D. Select whether the search starts at the beginning of the program or at the cursor  
position.  
Find/replace  
A
B
C
D
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
To activate/deactivate the selection box (B) (C).  
To select an option of a group (D).  
To start the search.  
To cancel the search and close the dialog box.  
Afterdefiningthesearchoptions, press[ENTER]tostartthesearchor[ESC]tocancel  
it.  
The text found in the program will be highlighted and the softkey menu will show the  
following options:  
• Replace, to replace the highlighted text.  
• Replace all, to replace the text throughout the whole program.  
• Find next, to skip this text and keep on searching.  
To end the search, press [ESC].  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.4.6 Customizing  
It is used for personalizing the appearance and properties of the editing window.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the available options. To return  
to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
Customizing "Appearance" (looks)  
It is used for personalizing the look of the different elements of the editing window  
and the colors of the elements of the program.  
11.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows the dialog box with two panels. The first  
one has the elements of the editing window that may be customized and the second  
one those of the program. The panel is selected by the key combination  
[CTRL]+[TAB].  
Set aspect  
B
A
C
B
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
To select an option of a group (A).  
To turnon/off the checkboxes(C), and to open/close the droplists  
(B).  
After defining the new look, use the cursor to select one of the buttons here below  
to accept or ignore the changes made and press [ENTER].  
A
B
C
(A) To accept the changes and close the dialog box.  
(B) To ignore the changes and close the dialog box.  
(C) To apply the changes and close the dialog box.  
The dialog box may alsobe closed directlywithout accepting thechanges bypressing  
[ESC].  
8070 CNC  
Customizing "Save always" & "Not always"  
It is used to save the program automatically or manually.  
• When "auto-save" is on, the CNC will automatically save the program after every  
change.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
• When "manual save" is active, the user must save the program (as explained in  
the "11.4.2 File" section of this chapter).  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.5 Program monitoring  
To monitor a program, select it from the list of the service window and select the  
"Monitoring" option of the softkey menu. The CNC will display the monitoring window  
and it will show the instructions of the selected program.  
To close the monitoring window, press [ESC].  
Description of the monitoring window  
11.  
The editing window shows the following information:  
A
B
C
A. Title bar.  
It shows the name of the program that is being monitored.  
B. Monitoring area.  
It shows the status of the instructions being executed. It is a real-time monitoring.  
Only the instructions that are being executed are monitored.  
The PLC will show, in a differentcolor, the instructions that are not being executed  
such as the first cycle or those subroutines whose call is not active. The default  
colors are:  
Red  
Active variables.  
Green  
Black  
Instruction that is not being executed.  
Inactive variable or comment.  
C. Data entry area.  
It is used to modify the values of the PLC resources.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.6 Program monitoring (softkeys)  
When selecting the "Monitoring" option of the softkey menu, the following options will  
appear.  
Monitoring "Size +"  
Every time this softkey is pressed, the size of the text will increase.  
Monitoring "Size -"  
11.  
Every time this softkey is pressed, the size of the text will decrease.  
Monitoring "Bold"  
When selecting this option, the text of the program appears in bold.  
Monitoring "OFF/ON"  
It interrupts and resumes program monitoring. While monitoring is interrupted, the  
resource status changes are not updated.  
Interrupting the monitoring does not stop the execution of the PLC.  
Monitoring "Find"  
To find text in a program.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be  
found. Key in the text and press [ENTER] to begin the search.  
Find  
To search for the next program (in descending order).  
To search for the previous program (in ascending order).  
To end the search and close the dialog box.  
As the text is being searched, the cursor will position on the match found. To end the  
search, press [ESC].  
Monitoring "Customize"  
It is used to personalize certain functions of the monitoring window. When selecting  
this option, the CNC shows a dialog box with the options available for customizing.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.7 "Commands" service  
The "Commands" service is used to debug the PLC program execution by taking  
advantage of the possibility to execute the various parts of the program separately  
(first cycle, main module and periodic module). This service also offers the possibility  
of starting up and interrupting the execution of the PLC program.  
When selecting this service, the horizontal softkey menu offers all the options  
associated with this service.  
11.  
11.7.1 Options of the "Commands" service (softkeys)  
Commands "Run"  
It starts the execution of the PLC program.  
1. The first cycle (CY1) is executed once.  
2. Cyclic execution of the main program (PRG) and the periodic module (PE).  
The main program is executed according to the frequency defined by machine  
parameter.  
The periodic module is executed according to the frequency defined in the  
program.  
Commands "Stop"  
It interrupts the execution of the PLC program.  
Commands "CY1"  
It executes the part of the program corresponding to the first cycle (CY1). The CNC  
does not execute this option when the PLC program is running.  
Commands "Cycle"  
It executes the main program (PRG) once. The CNC does not execute this option  
when the PLC program is running.  
Commands "Resume"  
It resumes the cyclic execution of the PLC program. The CNC does not execute this  
option when the PLC program is running.  
Commands "PE module"  
It executes the periodic module (PE) once. The CNC does not execute this option  
when the PLC program is running.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.8 "Outputs" service  
The "Outputs" service shows the following information:  
• The result of generating (compiling) the PLC program.  
• The result of analyzing a file of mnemonics.  
• The result of text search in the files making up the PLC project.  
Pressing the "Show" softkey accesses the screen of this service that shows this  
information. To close the window, press [ESC].  
11.  
Description of the outputs service  
The screen of this service looks like this:  
A
B
A. Title bar.  
It shows the type of information displayed in the window (information about the  
compilation, file analysis or a search).  
B. Requested information.  
It shows the requested information.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.8.1 Options of the "Outputs" service  
When accessing the "Outputs" service, the softkeys will show the following option.  
Outputs "Compiling info"  
It shows the result of compiling (generating) the PLC program. The screen shows a  
list of warning or errors detected when compiling the PLC program.  
After selecting a warning or error from the list, it is possible to go to the erroneous  
line by pressing the relevant icon.  
11.  
Keys to move the cursor  
To select the previous or next message or error.  
To select the previous or next information page.  
To select the first or last message or error from the list.  
Outputs "Checking info"  
It shows the result of analyzing the file of mnemonics. The screen shows a list of the  
error detected when analyzing the program.  
After selecting a warning or error from the list, it is possible to go to the erroneous  
line by pressing the relevant icon.  
Outputs "Search info"  
It shows the result of searching text in the programs making up the PLC project.  
After selecting an element from the list, it is possible to go to its line by pressing the  
relevant icon.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.9 "Logic analyzer" service  
The "Logic analyzer" service is used to analyze the behavior of the logic PLC signals  
according to a time base and certain trigger conditions set by the user.  
Upto8 PLCvariables orexpressions may beanalyzedatthesame timeandtheresult  
of the analysis (the traces) will appear on a graphic interface that facilitates the  
interpretation of the data. Once the done capturing data, the user may:  
• Modify the time base to display different zooms of the traces.  
• Move along the traces to display points, times, time differences, etc.  
11.  
To close the window, press [ESC].  
Description of the logic analizer  
The logic analyzer looks like this:  
A
B
C
D
A. The data area is used to define the variables or expressions to be analyzed. Up  
to 8 PLC variables or expressions may be defined.  
B. The graphic area shows the traces for the defined PLC variables or expressions  
and a trace of the PLC cycles with the indicated conditions.  
Also, a vertical red line is displayed to indicate the triggerpoint (ifany) and a green  
line to indicate the cursor position.  
C. The information area is used to define the data that conditions the display of the  
traces (trigger, type of trigger, time base and trace status).  
D. The data entry area is used to modify the PLC resources.  
Softkey menus  
When selecting the logic analyzer, the horizontal softkey menu offers all the options  
associated with this service. The set of options offered by this menu may be changed  
using the "+" softkey which offers a new set of options.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.9.1 Editing logic analyzer data  
In order to capture trace data, the user must enter the variables or expressions to be  
analyzed, the trigger type and conditions as well as the time based to be used to  
display the captured values.  
To editthis data, select the graphic area of the logic analyzer andpress the "Editview"  
softkey to place the cursor on the data editing area.  
Keys for defining the data of the logic analyzer  
11.  
To move the cursor through the data.  
To move the cursor whitin a data.  
To display the drop list menus.  
To validate the defined data.  
To quit (cancels) editing data.  
Definition of variables  
Up to 8 PLC variables or expressions may be defined to obtain their trace. The  
definition of the expression cannot exceed 80 characters.  
When modifying a variable, if there was already a trace of that expression, the trace  
will be deleted when validating the new edition.  
Trigger condition  
A trigger condition is the one used to capture data and may be defined with a PLC  
variable or expression. The definition ofthe expression cannot exceed 80 characters.  
If the trigger condition is modified after a data capture, all the traces will be deleted  
when validating the new condition.  
Trigger type  
It sets whether the data is to be captured "before", "after" or "before and after" the  
selected trigger condition is met.  
By default  
Before  
The data capture starts and ends when the operator selects the  
option to execute and stop the trace.  
Thedatacapture startswhenthe triggerconditionismetandends  
when the operator selects the option to stop the trace.  
Oncethe tracehasbeenexecuted, the triggersignalwillbe shown  
at the beginning of the trace.  
After  
The data capture starts when the operator selects the option to  
execute the trace and ends when the trigger condition is met.  
Once the trace has been executed, the trigger signal will appear  
at the end of the trace.  
In the middle  
The data capture starts and ends when the operator selects the  
option to execute and stop the trace.  
Oncethe tracehasbeenexecuted, the triggersignalwillbe shown  
at the center of the trace.  
8070 CNC  
Time base  
Theoperatormayusethisparametertoassignthe timeframetoeach verticaldivision.  
The size of these divisions, therefore the resolution of these signals will be  
determined by this time base. Consequently, the smaller the time base, the greater  
the signal resolution.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
The value is given in milliseconds or microseconds according to the active units and  
the selected value will be displayed in the information area.  
There is a mark that changes states every 2ms.  
With a time base of 10ms, 20ms and 4ms it will look like this.  
11.  
While the graphic window is selected, use the "+" and "-" keys to divide or multiply  
this time base by two.  
Start distance / Trigger distance  
This data is only shown when there is a trace.  
Start distance  
It represents the time difference between the indicator  
cursor and the base point of the trace (beginning ofthe  
trace if there is no trigger point or it has not been  
reached).  
Trigger distance  
It represents the time difference between the indicator  
cursor and the trigger point (if it has taken place).  
The value is updated when moving the indicator cursor of the graphic area. Its value  
may also be edited, thus updating the cursor position in the graphic area.  
Reference distance  
This data is only shown when there is a trace already and the operator has put a  
reference signal. It represents the time difference between the indicator cursor and  
the reference signal.  
The value is updated when moving the indicator cursor of the graphic area. Its value  
may also be edited, thus updating the cursor position in the graphic area.  
Trace status  
This element cannot be edited, it automatically reflects the status of the trace. The  
possible messages are:  
• Empty.  
• Beginning.  
• Executing.  
• Stopping.  
• Full.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.9.2 Save, load and reset the analyzer configuration  
Save the configuration  
It is used to save the current configuration of the logic analyzer (PLC variables and  
expressions, trigger conditions, graphic traces) into a file.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of trace files (TRC) already saved.  
To save the current configuration:  
1. Define the filename atthe bottom window. To replace an existing file, selectit from  
the list.  
11.  
2. Press [ENTER] to save the configuration or [ESC] to return to the logic analyzer  
without saving the configuration.  
Load the configuration  
It is used to recover a logic analyzer configuration that has been stored earlier.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a list of trace files (TRC) already saved.  
To load one of these files:  
1. Define the file name at the bottom window or select it from the list.  
2. Press [ENTER] to save the configuration or [ESC] to return to the logic analyzer  
without loading the configuration.  
Initialize the configuration  
Itisusedto resetalltheanalyzerdata eliminatingthe definedvariablesorexpressions  
as well as the trigger condition and trigger type. The traces are also deleted because  
there are no variables to be analyzed.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.9.3 Execute and analyze trace  
Execute trace / Stop trace  
It used to start or stop the data capture to display the traces.  
Analyze trace  
It is used to analyze the different graphic aspects of the trace.  
When selecting this option, the softkey menu shows the options available for  
analyzing the trace. To return to the main menu, press the key for the previous menu.  
11.  
• Go to the beginning  
It moves the indicator cursor and the current graphic view to the beginning of the  
trace.  
• Go to the end  
It moves the indicator cursor and the current graphic view to the end of the trace.  
• Go to the time  
It moves the indicator cursor and the current graphic view to the time value set  
by the operator with respect to the base point of the trace (starting point of the  
trace if there is no trigger or to the trigger point if there is one).  
• Go to trigger  
It moves the indicator cursor and the current graphic view to the trigger point.  
• Go to reference  
It moves the indicator cursor and the current graphic view to the reference point  
defined earlier.  
• Set reference  
It sets a reference point at the current cursor position for time difference  
calculation.  
• Remove reference  
Removes the reference point defined earlier.  
Trace view / Edit view  
It toggles between the graphic window and the data and display conditions area.  
MS (milliseconds) / US (microseconds)  
It toggles between milliseconds (0.001-3 seconds)and microseconds (10-6 seconds).  
Print  
It is used to print the graph on a printer connected to the CNC or as a BMP file in the  
CNC. When printing to a file, it is saved in the folder:  
"C:\Cnc8070\Mtb\Plc\Watch\*.bmp"  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.9.4 Customize the appearance of the logic analyzer  
It is used to customize the looks of the different elements of the logic analyzer.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box with the options available  
for customizing.  
Set aspect  
11.  
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
To show the color palette.  
To select a color from the palette  
Accep the selection in the color palette  
It cancels the selection in the color palette.  
After defining the new look, use the cursor to select one of the buttons here below  
to accept or ignore the changes made and press [ENTER].  
A
B
C
(A) To accept the changes and close the dialog box.  
(B) To ignore the changes and close the dialog box.  
(C) To apply the changes and close the dialog box.  
The dialogboxmay alsobe closed directlywithoutacceptingthechanges bypressing  
[ESC].  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.10 "Monitoring" service  
Thisservice is used to analyze the status ofthe various PLC variables and resources.  
When selecting the "Monitoring" option at the service window, it will show a list with  
the three resource files used last. This will let you recover one of them without having  
to define it again.  
Pressing the "Show" softkey access the service screen. If a file was selected from  
the list, it will show the resources defined in it. To close the monitoring window, press  
[ESC].  
11.  
Description of the monitoring service  
This service screen is divided into several windows that may be accessed with the  
window switching key.  
The monitoring screen looks like this:  
A
B
A. Resources selected for monitoring.  
It shows the user resources and symbols being analyzed. They are shown  
grouped in the following tables:  
Timers  
Counters  
Registers  
Binary resources  
Each of them shows information on the status of those resources.  
B. Data entry area.  
It is used to define the user resources and symbols to be analyzed and modify  
their values by directly assigning a value to them.  
Softkey menus  
When selecting this service, the horizontal softkey menu will show all the options  
associated with resource monitoring. The set of options offered by this menu may be  
changed using the "+" softkey which offers a new set of options.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.10.1 Description of resource tables  
As mentioned earlier, the user resources and symbols defined are displayed in  
different tables. Each table shows the following information.  
Timers  
This table shows the timers and user defined symbols for the timers and their status.  
This table has the following fields:  
11.  
G
M
It indicates whether any of the trigger inputs of the timer is active (TG1,  
TG2, TG3 or TG4).  
Timer status:  
S - Stopped.  
T - Timing.  
D - Disabled.  
E
Status of the Enable input (TEN).  
Status of the Reset input (TRS)  
Status output.  
R
T
ET  
TO  
Elapsed time.  
Remaining time.  
The inputs and outputs that are high will be indicated with a green symbol.  
Registers  
This table shows the registers and user symbols defined for the registers as well as  
their values.  
The values may be shown in decimal, hexadecimal or binary format.  
Binary resources  
This table shows the binary resources (inputs, outputs, messages, errors) and the  
user defined symbols for the binary resources as well as information on the their  
status.  
Counters  
This table shows the counters and user symbols defined for the counters as well as  
their status.  
This table has the following fields:  
E
U
D
P
S
C
Status of the enable input (CEN).  
Status of the Count-up input (CUP).  
Status of the Countdown input (CDW).  
Status of the preset input (CPR).  
Status output.  
8070 CNC  
Value of the internal count of the counter.  
The inputs and outputs that are high will be indicated with a green symbol.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.10.2 Definition of the table resources  
Each table shows the following resources and user symbols:  
Timer table  
• Timers (T1...T256).  
• User symbols defined for the timers.  
Counter table  
• Counters (C1...C256).  
• User symbols defined for the counters.  
11.  
Register table  
• Registers (R1...R1024).  
• User symbols defined for the registers.  
• PLC-CNC register variables.  
Binary resource table  
• Inputs (I1...I1024) and outputs (O1...O1024).  
• Marks (M1...M8192).  
• Messages (MSG1...MSG256) and errors (ERR1...ERR256).  
• User symbols defined for the binary resources.  
• CNC-PLC boolean variables.  
When defining a resource or user symbol, it will be added to the corresponding table.  
Data entry  
The resourcesandusersymbols ofthe tables aredefined atthe dataentryarea. Their  
values may be changed by directly assigning a value to them (M110=1, R300=34).  
If it is a hexadecimal value, it must be preceded by the "$" sign (M10=$1, R200=$20).  
The window saves the last "N" assignments so they can be recalled later on. In order  
to make selecting easier, it is possible to display a window with the list of the  
assignments already made.  
Keys for defining the data of the logic analyzer  
To select the assignments.  
To assume the selected assignments.  
To show the list of the assignments made.  
To close the list of the assignments made.  
To remove a resource or user symbol from a table, select that element and press  
[SUP].  
Keys for defining the data of the logic analyzer  
8070 CNC  
To select one of the tables.  
To moves the cursor element by element.  
To move the cursor page by page in the table.  
To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the table.  
To delete the selected resource of the table.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.10.3 Options of the "Monitoring" service (softkeys).  
When accessing the "Monitoring" option of the softkey menu, the following options  
will be available.  
Save set  
It is used to save the set of defined resources into a file.  
When selecting this option, the CNC displays a window with the list of the files (.MON)  
currently saved. To save a set of defined resources:  
11.  
1. Define the file name at the bottom window. To replace an existing one, select it  
from the list.  
2. Press [ENTER] to save the program or [ESC] to cancel the selection and close  
the program listing.  
Load set  
It is used to recover the set of resources previously saved into a file.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a window with the list of available files.  
To load one of these files:  
1. Define the file name at the bottom window or select it from the list.  
2. Press [ENTER]to load the selected file or [ESC] to cancel the operation and close  
the program listing.  
Binary  
It toggles between displaying the register values in decimal and hexadecimal format  
or only in binary.  
Visibility  
It shows or hides certain resource tables.  
Add row  
It increases the size of the active window (where the cursor is) by adding a file to it.  
To move the cursor through the active tables.  
Remove row  
It decreases the size of the active window (where the cursor is) by removing a row  
from it.  
To move the cursor through the active tables.  
Data input  
It selects the data entry area.  
8070 CNC  
Clear all  
It deletes all the resources from the tables.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.11 "Cross references" service  
The "Cross references" service may be used to obtain information about the PLC  
resources being used in the PLC project.  
Pressing the "Show" softkey accesses the window of this service. To close the cross-  
reference window, press [ESC].  
Description  
11.  
The screen of this service looks like this:  
A
B
C
D
A. Name of the resources being used by the PLC project.  
B. File of the PLC project where the resource is being used.  
C. Line, within the file, containing the resource.  
D. How the resource is being used.  
For the inputs, outputs, marks and registers:  
?
The resource is used as a consultation.  
The resource is used as an action.  
=
For the timers.  
TG  
T
Timer trigger.  
Status consultation.  
Enable input.  
TEN  
TRS  
Reset input.  
For the counters.  
C
Status consultation.  
CPR  
CEN  
CUP  
CDW  
Counter preset.  
Enable input.  
8070 CNC  
Count-up input.  
Countdown input.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.11.1 Options of the "Cross reference" service (softkeys)  
When accessing the "Cross reference" service, the softkey menu will offer the  
following options:  
Inputs  
It shows information about the inputs.  
Outputs  
11.  
It shows information about the outputs.  
Marks  
It shows information about the marks.  
Registers  
It shows information about the registers.  
Timers  
It shows information about the timers.  
Counters  
It shows information about the counters.  
Print  
It is used to print the cross reference tables out to a printer connected to the CNC  
or as a "*.PRN" file at the CNC. When printing to a file, it is saved in the folder:  
"C:\Cnc8070\Users\Reports\*.prn"  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the destination  
for the file (printer or file). When printing to a file, it is possible to select the name and  
location of the file.  
Print destination  
To select the print destination.  
To print the drawing.  
To cancel the printing.  
After selecting the destination, press [ENTER] to print the table or [ESC] to cancel it.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.12 "Statistics" service  
The "Statistics" service may be used to obtain information about the execution times  
of the PLC and the files making up the PLC project.  
Pressing the "Show"softkey access the service screen. Toclosethe statisticsscreen,  
press [ESC].  
Description  
11.  
The screen of this service looks like this:  
A
B
A. Execution time-table.  
This table shows the following data (from left to right):  
• Modules making up the PLC program.  
• Minimum module execution time.  
• Maximum module execution time.  
• Average module execution time.  
• Module execution frequency.  
B. PLC file table.  
This table shows the following data (from left to right):  
• Files making up the PLC project.  
• Size of each file.  
• File type.  
• Date last modified.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.12.1 Options of the "Statistics" service (softkeys)  
Refresh  
It refreshes the table information.  
Print  
It is used to print the tables out to a printer connected to the CNC or to a file (*.PRN)  
at the CNC. When printing to a file, it is saved in the folder:  
"C:\Cnc8070\Users\Reports\*.prn"  
11.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the destination  
for the file (printer or file). When printing to a file, it is possible to select the name and  
location of the file.  
Print destination  
To select the print destination.  
To print the drawing.  
To cancel the printing.  
After selecting the destination, press [ENTER] to print the table or [ESC] to cancel it.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.13 "Messages" service  
The "Messages"servicemaybe usedtoeditthetexts associatedwith PLCmessages  
and errors. These files may also be displayed and edited (and thus translated into  
other languages) using any text editor.  
The message and error files are stored in the folder:  
"C:\CNC8070\MTB\PLC\LANG"\<language>" corresponding to the language active  
attheCNC. To usemessagesanderrorsinotherlanguages, copythe filestothefolder  
of the desired language.  
11.  
On CNC power-up, the messages and errors are loaded from the folder  
corresponding to the language active at the CNC.  
Pressing the "Show" softkey access the service screen. To close the message  
window, press [ESC].  
Description  
This screen shows the messages (MSG) and errors (ERR) defined at the PLC. The  
screen shows the following table:  
A
B
C
D
A. Message or error identifier.  
Number, between 1 and 256, that identifies the message (MSG) or the error  
(ERR). The numbering needs not be sequential.  
B. Display of the additional information files.  
It indicates whether to show or not the file for additional information when  
displaying the message. When it comes to errors, it cannot be edited.  
C. Text of the message or error displayed for the user.  
D. Address of the additional information file.  
It may be a text file (*.txt), image file (*.bmp, *.jpg), a combination of both (*.htm,  
*.html) or a video (*.avi). When it comes to errors, it cannot be edited because  
they cannot be assigned an information file.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.13.1 Options of the "Messages" service (softkeys)  
Save  
It saves the message and error table into a file in ASCII format (*.MEF).  
The contents of the table may be saved at the CNC, in a floppy disk or in another CNC  
(or PC) via Ethernet.  
Load  
11.  
It recovers the table values saved earlier in the hard disk of the CNC.  
Print  
It prints the message and error table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a  
file (*.PRN format) at the CNC.  
New message  
It is used to define a new message in the table.  
New error  
It is used to define a new error in the table.  
Select information  
It selects the file for additional information.  
Delete  
It deletes the selected message or error from the table.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.13.2 Editing the message and error table  
Messages  
To add a new message to the table, press the "New message" softkey. The CNC adds  
a new row to the table and it identifies it with the label -MSG-, indicating that it  
corresponds to a message.  
To edit or modify the table data, use the cursor to select the cell whose value is to  
be changed and define the data as follows:  
11.  
• The number and text of the message is entered directly from the keyboard.  
• The "show" option is turned on and off with the [SPACE] key.  
• The file for additional information may be entered directly or may be selected with  
the "Select Info" softkey.  
Keys for defining the data of the logic analyzer  
To move the cursor to the upper, lower, left or right cell.  
To move the cursor to the beginning / end of the row.  
To move the cursor to the beginning/end of the column.  
Press [ENTER] every time a data is edited to acceptthe new value or [ESC] to cancel  
it.  
To delete a message from the table, select it with the cursor and press the "Delete"  
softkey.  
Errors  
To add a new error to the table, press the "New error" softkey. The CNC adds a new  
row to the table and it identifies it with the label -ERR-, indicating that it corresponds  
to an error.  
To edit or modify the table data, use the cursor to select the cell whose value is to  
be changed and define the data as follows:  
• The number and text of the error are entered directly from the keyboard.  
• The "show" option and the file for additional information cannot be edited.  
Press [ENTER] every time a data is edited to acceptthe new value or [ESC] to cancel  
it.  
To delete an error from the table, select it with the cursor and press the "Delete"  
softkey.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.13.3 Displaying PLC messages  
When activating a message (marks "MSG1" through "MSG256"), the PLC message  
window(topright)showsthemessagenumberanditsassociatedtext.Ifthemessage  
has been defined so it shows a file with additional information, it will be displayed at  
full screen (if the file does not exist, a blue screen will be displayed).  
If there are several active messages, it will display the one with highest priority (the  
one with lowest number). It will also show the "+" sign next to the PLC message  
window to indicate that there are more messages activated by the PLC.  
11.  
Message window  
In order to expand the PLC message window and display the active message list,  
press the key combination [CTRL]+[M]. The list will show a symbol next to each  
message to indicate that it has a file with additional information associated with it.  
It does not have a file with additional information.  
It has a file with additional information.  
To display a message, select it with the cursor and press [ENTER]. If the message  
has an additional information file, it will be displayed on the screen. To close the  
additional information window, press [ESC].  
File with additional information  
The files with additional information, defined by the machine manufacturer, may be  
displayed automatically when activating the message (if so defined in the message  
table) or when requested by the user (at the message window).  
The following keys are available to move around in the additional information window  
depending on the type of file displayed (TXT, BMP, JPG, HTM, HTML or AVI):  
• TXT, BMP, JPG, HTM, HTML file.  
To move the window contents up or down one line, one page or  
everything.  
• AVI file.  
Tostopandmovesthe videoforwardorbackward1frame,5 frames  
or the whole video.  
To stop the video.  
To play the video.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.13.4 Displaying PLC errors  
Whenactivatinganerror(marks"ERR1"through"ERR256"),part-programexecution  
is interrupted and the center of the screen displays a window with the error number  
and its associated text.  
Error window  
When there is an active error, no other action but deleting it is allowed.  
Although the error window disappears from the screen when pressing [ESC], the  
error state is not eliminated. To get out of the error state, press [RESET].  
11.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.13.5 Save, load and print a message and error table  
Save table  
To save the table data, press the "Save" softkey and the CNC will show a list with the  
files saved at the CNC.  
To save the table data:  
1. Select the destination folder.  
2. Define the filename atthe bottom window. To replace an existing file, selectit from  
the list.  
11.  
3. Press [ENTER] to save the file or [ESC] to cancel the operation.  
The file will be saved with the extension: *.MEF.  
Load table  
To recover the table data, press the "Load" softkey, the CNC will show a list with the  
files available at the CNC.  
To load the table data:  
1. Select the folder where the file is.  
2. Select the file or write its name at the bottom window.  
3. Press [ENTER] to accept the selection or [ESC] to cancel it and close the file  
listing.  
Print table  
It prints the message and error table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a  
file (*.PRN format) at the CNC. When printing to a file, it is saved in the folder:  
"C:\Cnc8070\Users\Reports\*.prn"  
When selecting this option, the CNC will show a dialog box requesting the destination  
for the table (printer or file).  
Print destination  
To select the print destination.  
To print the drawing.  
To cancel the printing.  
After selecting the destination, press [ENTER] to print the table or [ESC] to cancel it.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operation manual  
11.  
8070 CNC  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MACHINE PARAMETERS  
12  
In order for the machine tool to be able to properly execute the programmed  
instructions, the CNC must know the specific data of the machine such as feedrates,  
accelerations, feedback, automatic tool change, etc.  
This data is set by the machine manufacturer and must be defined in the machine  
parameter table.  
Selecting the machine parameter tables  
The machine parameter tables may be accessed either using the user key if it has  
been set accordingly or from the task window. The task window may be accessed  
with key combination [CTRL]+[A].  
What can you do in this work mode?  
The machine parameter operating mode offers the following operations:  
• Edit and modify the machine parameter tables.  
• Validate the machine parameter tables.  
• Saving the table contents.  
• Recalling the table contents.  
• Printing the table contents.  
• Initializing the tables.  
The machine parameter tables may be edited in this mode or be copied from a floppy  
disk or other peripheral connected to the CNC via Ethernet.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Parameter setting  
To set the machine parameter tables, proceed as follows:  
1. Edit the values of the tables.  
First, set the general machine parameters because they define the axes of the  
machine, thus the axis machine parameters.  
The general machine parameters can also be used to define the data forthe cross  
compensation.  
Use the axis machine parameters to determine whether leadscrew error  
compensation will be applied or not and define the data of the corresponding  
table.  
12.  
2. Validate the table data.  
This operation is a must after defining the parameters of the tables and every time  
any of the data is modified.  
3. Save the data of the table.  
It is recommended to save the data of the machine parameter table so as to have  
a backup copy of them. The data may be stored at the CNC, in a floppy disk or  
at another CNC (or PC) connected through Ethernet.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
12.1 Appearance of the machine parameter tables  
When this mode is active, it will be indicated at the top right side of the general status  
bar.  
This operating mode consists of several tables. The various tables may be selected  
using the horizontal softkeys. If while one of the tables is selected, the previous menu  
key is pressed, that table will be deselected.  
The available machine parameter tables are:  
• General parameters.  
12.  
• Axis and spindle parameters.  
• Jog parameters.  
• Parameters related to the "M" functions.  
• Parameters for kinetics.  
• Parameters for the magazines.  
• HMI parameters.  
• OEM parameters.  
Standard configuration  
The standard configuration of this work mode, described in this manual corresponds  
to the one supplied by Fagor. In some cases, the manual shows a sample screen,  
instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
12.1.1 Icon description (vertical softkeys)  
The icons are activated with their associated softkey (F8 to F12).  
The icon menu offers all the options for the selected table. The group of icons of this  
menu may be expanded with the softkey associated with the "+" icon that offers a new  
set of icons.  
12.  
List of icons  
Display units (millimeters/inches)  
To toggle between the two types of units used to represent the parameters that  
depend on those units (coordinates, feedrates, etc.).  
The icon highlights the units currently selected (millimeters or inches).  
Initialize table  
It resets all the parameters to their default values.  
The CNC will request confirmation of the command.  
Find text  
It is used to find a text or a value in the table.  
When selecting this option, the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be  
found.  
Validate table  
For validating the table data. If there is no table selected, all the data of all the tables  
will be validated.  
This table is necessary after changing a data. In certain cases, the CNC will have  
to turned off and back on in order for the data to be validated.  
Save tool  
It saves the values of the table into a file. If there is no table selected, all the data of  
all the tables will be saved.  
This file may be saved at the CNC, in a floppy disk or at another CNC (or PC)  
connected through Ethernet.  
Recall table  
It restores the values of the table previously saved into a file. If there is no table  
selected, all the data of all the tables will be recalled.  
CNC 8070  
Print table  
It prints the contents of the table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a file  
(*.PRN format) at the CNC.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Activate TEACH-IN  
It is used for activating the TEACH-IN work mode in order to set the leadscrew and  
cross compensation tables.  
12.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
12.2 Parameter table description  
The machine parameter tables have the following structure:  
A
12.  
B
C
D
E
F
G
A. Name of the selected machine parameter table.  
B. Parameter list.  
C. Parameter value, set by the user.  
D. Units used to define the parameter.  
E. Limit values for the parameter.  
F. Default value of the parameter.  
G. Parameter description.  
The section on "12.3.1 Data editing and validation" in this chapter shows how to  
edit the parameters of the tables.  
Certain parameters cannot be edited; they only access a set of parameters or a data  
table. These parameters will be identified as follows.  
To access a group of parameters.  
To access a data table.  
To access the data associated with the parameter, select the parameter with the  
cursor and press [ENTER]. To return to the previous parameter table, press [ESC].  
To obtain further information about the data appearing in the table, refer to the  
chapter on machine parameters of the Installation and Start-up Manual.  
i
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
12.2.1 "M" function setting table  
This table is accessed using the M-function machine parameter "DATA" and it has  
the following structure:  
A
12.  
B
C
D
E
F
G
A. Name of the selected machine parameter table.  
B. Order number.  
C. List of user defined "M" functions.  
D. Type of synchronism.  
E. Time for execution time estimate.  
F. Associated subroutine.  
G. Parameter description.  
The section on "12.3.1 Data editing and validation" in this chapter shows how to  
edit the parameters of the tables.  
To obtain further information about the data appearing in the table, refer to the  
chapter on machine parameters of the Installation and Start-up Manual.  
i
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
12.2.2 Compensation table  
There are two types of compensation table:  
• Leadscrew error compensation, which is accessed with the axis machine  
parameter "COMPENSATION".  
• Cross compensation, which is accessed with the general machine parameter  
"CROSS COMP".  
These compensation tables have the following structure:  
A
12.  
B
C
D
E
F
A. Name of the selected machine parameter table.  
B. Compensation point.  
C. User defined axis position.  
D. Amount of error to compensate in the positive direction.  
E. Amount of error to compensate in the negative direction.  
F. Parameter description.  
The section on "12.3.1 Data editing and validation" in this chapter shows how to  
edit the parameters of the tables.  
To obtain further information about the data appearing in the table, refer to the  
chapter on machine parameters of the Installation and Start-up Manual.  
i
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
12.3 Operations with tables  
12.3.1 Data editing and validation  
Use the softkey menu to select the desired machine parameter table. To edit the table  
data, proceed as follows:  
1. Use the cursor to select the parameter whose value is to be set.  
2. Keyin thedesired value.If[SUP]is pressed, theparameterwillassumethedefault  
value.  
12.  
3. Press [ENTER] to accept the new value or [ESC] to ignore the new value and  
recover the previous one.  
Parameter types  
Certain parameters can only assume specific values. These parameters will be  
identified as follows.  
The parameter has a list of options.  
The parameter refers to a file.  
Depending on the type of values they can assume, they will be defined as follows:  
• If the parameter may assume a value between specific limits, enter the desired  
value.  
If the value exceeds those limits, the parameter will assume its default value.  
• If the parameter contains a list of options, press [ENTER] to display the drop list  
and select one of those options.  
• If the parameter refers to a file, press [ENTER] and the CNC will show the list of  
available files.  
Data validation.  
After editing or modifying the table data, the new values must be validated so they  
are assumed by the CNC. To validate the data, press the VALIDATE icon.  
To validate certain parameters, restart the CNC. These parameters will be identified  
with the following symbol next to their name:  
Restarting the CNC required.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
12.3.2 Save and recall tables  
Saving a table  
It may be used to save the table data, in ASCII format, in a file.  
Use the softkey menu to select the table whose data is to be saved. If no table is  
selected, all the data of all the tables will be saved.  
12.  
After selecting the table whose data is to be saved, press the SAVE icon and the CNC  
shows a list with the tables that are already saved.  
Keys for selecting a data file  
To switch windows.  
To close and open a folder submenu.  
To move the cursor thru the elements of the window.  
To save the new program.  
To cancel the selection and close the programs listing.  
To save the table data, proceed as follows:  
1. Select the destination folder.  
2. Define the filename atthe bottom window. To replace anexisting file, selectitfrom  
the list.  
3. Press [ENTER] to save the file or [ESC] to return to the tables without saving the  
file.  
The files are saved with the extension *.MP.  
Recall a table  
It may be used to restore the table data, in ASCII format, from a file.  
Use the softkey menu to select the table whose data is to be recalled (restored). If  
no table is selected, all the data of all the tables will be recalled.  
After selecting the table whose data is to be restored, press the LOAD icon and the  
CNC shows a list with the tables that are already saved.  
To recall the table data, proceed as follows:  
1. Select the folder containing the file.  
2. Select the file from the list or write its name in the bottom window.  
3. Press [ENTER] to recall the data or [ESC] to return to the tables without recalling  
CNC 8070  
the data.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
12.3.3 Find text  
It is used to find text or a value in the table.  
To perform the search, press the FIND icon and the CNC will show a dialog box  
requesting the text or value to be searched. It is also possible to select whether the  
search must start at the beginning of the table or at the current cursor position.  
Find text  
12.  
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
It selects an option from a group.  
To start the search.  
To cancel the search and close the dialog box.  
To start the search, press [ENTER] and the cursor will position on the text found.  
Pressing this FIND icon again will allow repeating the search or defining a new one.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
12.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP ASSISTANCE  
13  
The set of utilities of the setup assistance is meant to speed up and simplify the  
machine setup procedure. The setup assistance offers the following utilities.  
• The oscilloscope.  
• The circularity (roundness) test.  
• The bode diagram.  
It must be borne in mind that these utilities are assistance tools that only show the  
system's response to the various adjustments; it is always up to the technician to  
choose the best adjustment.  
The oscilloscope  
The oscilloscopeis anassistancetoolforadjustingthe CNCandthedrives. Thisutility  
can graphically show 4 previously selected variables, modify their values and check  
the different responses of the system.  
Using the oscilloscope, itis possible to editthe CNC's machine parameters thataffect  
the adjustment; it is also possible to modify at the Sercos® drives the variables that  
have writing permission. In any case, a protection password is required for modifying  
the CNC's machine parameters or the drive's variables.  
The Bode diagram  
The Bode diagram is an assistance tool for adjusting the CNC and the drives. This  
utility may be used to obtain the Bode diagram of the response amplitude depending  
on the frequency of the input signal.  
With this tool, it is possible to insert a sinusoidal signal into an axis, so that changing  
the frequency and analyzing the response provides the behavior of the axes at  
different frequencies and will give the user an idea of how it behaves with any signal.  
This diagram may be used to check the system's gain, the bandwidth and the  
mechanical resonance. All this helps achieve the proper adjustment of the loops,  
analyze mechanical problems and check the final features.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
The circularity (roundness) test  
Thistool helps improve and adjust the axisreversalpeak, aneffect thatappearswhen  
the axes reverse their moving direction. With this utility, a circle may be executed with  
the axes and graphically show the result. This graphic shows the difference between  
the actual (real) coordinate obtained from the feedback device and the theoretical  
coordinate calculated at each point.  
The same screen showing the graphics also shows the machine parameters that  
affect the movement reversal. These parameters may be modified while running the  
test, thus being possible to evaluate the response of the system to these changes  
and optimize the adjustment on the go.  
13.  
Selection of setup assistance  
Setup assistance may be accessed either using the user key if it has been set  
accordinglyorfrom thetask window(byselecting the Tuning option). Thetask window  
may be accessed with key combination [CTRL]+[A].  
The different tools are accessed from the horizontal softkey menu.  
The oscilloscope.  
The Bode diagram.  
The circularity (roundness) test.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.1 Oscilloscope  
The oscilloscopeis anassistancetoolforadjustingthe CNCandthedrives. Thisutility  
can graphically show 4 previously selected variables, modify their values and check  
the different responses of the system.  
Using the oscilloscope, itis possible to editthe CNC's machine parameters thataffect  
the adjustment; it is also possible to modify at the Sercos® drives the variables that  
have writing permission. In any case, a protection password is required for modifying  
the CNC's machine parameters or the drive's variables.  
13.  
The oscilloscope is an assistance tool that only shows the response of the system  
to the various settings (adjustments); it is up to the technician to choose the best  
adjustment.  
How to access the oscilloscope  
The oscilloscope may be accessed from the softkey menu for setup assistance.  
Setup assistance  
Oscilloscope function  
This utility is one of the features of setup assistance. Together with the circularity test  
and the bode diagram, it helps speed up and simplify the machine setup process.  
The oscilloscope function requires Sercos communication anda drive version  
V06.01 or later. Otherwise, the CNC will show the error "Access denied".  
i
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.1.1 Interface description  
The screen of the oscilloscope function looks like this, with two clearly different parts.  
The left side and the lower side show the data of the variables to be shown, the trigger  
data, the time base and the parameters that may be acted upon. The top right side  
shows the variables graphically.  
13.  
The graphics window  
It is the area showing a graphic representation of the selected variables. For each  
variable, it shows the scale used to draw it.  
The data area  
It is the area where the user interacts with the system. It allows defining the graphic  
environment, the variables to be display, the trigger configuration, the time base  
configuration and the values of the parameters involved.  
Some of this data may also be defined at the configuration screen. See  
"Configuration screen" on page 275.  
Variables to be displayed  
It is the area where the user select the variables to be shown in the graphics window.  
Up to 4 variables may be displayed at the same time.  
This window does not allow selecting the color of each variable being displayed.  
To change the color of any variable, it must be done at the configuration  
screen.  
i
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Trigger data  
In this area, the user may select the trigger conditions. The options offered by this  
trigger data area are:  
Trigger  
It indicates when the data capture begins.  
If not selected, the data capture begins as soon as the user gives the command to  
begin. The "Flank", "Level" and "Position" data are ignored.  
13.  
If selected, the trigger condition must be specified with the "Flank", "Level" and  
"Position" data.  
Channel  
It indicates which variable or channel (CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4) is to be used as  
reference or trigger condition.  
Flank  
It may be up-flank (leading edge) or down-flank (trailing edge).  
It is taken into account when trigger has been selected.  
Trigger level  
It sets the value to be assumed by the variable to start capturing data.  
It is taken into account when trigger has been selected.  
Position (%)  
It is taken into account when Trigger has been selected.  
It is defined as a percentage, between 0% and 100%. It indicates the number of  
samples to be taken before the Trigger. For example, a 10% position indicates that  
10% of the total number of programmed samples will be taken before the Trigger and  
the remaining 90% after that instant.  
The Trigger condition is evaluated after gathering the indicated % of samples. If the  
position is defined as 50% and the Trigger condition takes place after taking 10% of  
the samples, it is ignored until capturing 50% of the samples.  
Machine parameters to be set  
In this area of the data window, it is possible to directly change the values of up to  
20 machine parameters to be adjusted.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Softkey menu  
Horizontal softkey menu  
The horizontal softkey menu offers the following options:  
‡ Softkey CONFIG  
It access the configuration screen. It may be used to define which variables will  
be displayed, their scale, colors, time base, the Trigger, the trigger condition, the  
parameters to act upon, etc.  
13.  
‡ Softkey DATA  
It accesses the data processing submenu. This submenu serves to save and load  
the captured trace as well as the configuration defined for it.  
It may also be used to send data of the captured trace out to printer or to a file.  
‡ Enlarge screen  
With this option, it is possible to enlarge the graphics window to the left, using the  
area that shows the variables to be displayed. Pressing the same softkey returns  
the screen to the previous size.  
‡ Softkey OVERLAP CHANNELS  
Wit this option, several channels may be overlapped.  
When this option is selected, the softkey color changes to red.  
‡ Softkey AUTOSCALE  
Whenautoscalinga channel, thesystem determinestheproperverticalscaleand  
offset so the signal appears as enlarged as possible inside its graphic area.  
‡ Softkey FREEZE SCREEN  
The display is "frozen" without interrupting the data capture. When this option is  
selected, the softkey shows "Resume".  
This softkey only appears on the horizontal softkey menu if the capture is in  
continuous mode. To set the capture in continuous mode, change the "mode"  
option of the configuration screen.  
i
‡ Softkey BEGIN CAPTURE  
Start taking data to show it graphically.  
When this option is selected, the softkey shows "Stop".  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Vertical softkey menu  
Depending on which data has the focus, the vertical softkeys show different options.  
Focus on a variable of a channel  
When the focus is on any of the variables, the vertical softkeys will be:  
The scale of the graphic may be changed with the "scale" softkeys. The new scale  
value will appear on the graphic next to the corresponding variable.  
13.  
The graphics of the desired channel may be moved up and down using the offset  
softkeys.  
This softkey may also be used to center the graphics.  
When the focus is on any of the variables, a new variable name may be either  
keyed in or selected without having to go to "CONFIG".  
i
Focus on the "WIN" field  
With win, it shows the oscilloscope window where it is. When the focus is on this field,  
the vertical softkeys will be:  
It takes the window to the beginning.  
It takes the window to the end.  
It takes the window to the trigger. If there is no trigger, it will go to the center of the  
window.  
Moves the window to the left.  
Moves the window to the right.  
Focus on the "T/Div" field  
When the focus is on the "T/Div" field, the following softkeys will appear.  
Using the autoscale softkey, the oscilloscope selects the righttime scale so the signal  
appears as large as possible inside its corresponding graphic area.  
CNC 8070  
It increases or decreases the time scale.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Focus on the "C1" or "C2" field  
Cursors "C1" and "C2" may be used to analyze each signal of the last data capture.  
These two cursors may be used to obtain the position in milliseconds of each signal  
and the time difference between them "∆".  
When the focus is on one of the fields "C1" or "C2", the following vertical softkeys will  
appear.  
Takes the cursor to the beginning.  
13.  
Takes the cursor to the end.  
Takesthecursortothetrigger. Ifthereisnotrigger, itwillgoto thecenterofthewindow.  
Moves the cursor to the left.  
Moves the cursor to the right.  
Focus on the "parameter name" field  
As with variables, by selecting the various parameters, it is possible to change their  
names and values.  
When pressing "Enter" after changing the name of a parameter, use the up, down,  
left and right arrow keys to move the focus to the next field to change the value of  
that parameter. After changing the parameter value and pressing "Enter", the focus  
does not go on to the next field. Use the arrow keys to go on to the next parameter.  
When the focus is on this field, the 4 vertical softkeys will be:  
It increases the value of the parameter in the amount indicated on the configuration  
screen.  
It decreases the value of the parameter in the amount indicated on the configuration  
screen.  
It resets the parameter to its default value.  
It validates the value given to the parameter.  
CNC 8070  
From the "CONFIG" mode, a screen may be accessed where it is possible to  
define the list of parameters to be displayed.  
i
(SOFT V03.0X)  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.1.2 Configuration screen  
The configuration screen may be accessed with the horizontal softkey "CONFIG".  
This screenlooks like thiswith two clearly different areas. The left side shows the data  
of the variables to be displayed, the trigger data and the time base. The right side  
shows the parameters to be acted upon and the amount to increase/decrease the  
values of those parameters.  
13.  
Selection of the variables to be displayed, trigger and time base  
It is the area where the user selects the variables to be displayed at the graphics  
window, the trigger options and the time base. Up to 4 variables may be displayed  
at the same time.  
Whentyping thenameofanyvariableincorrectly, theCNC willshowtheerror"Access  
denied".  
Besides the trigger data and the base time, this window may be used to select the  
color used to display the variable and whether it will be visible or not.  
Parameter selection and increase/decrease  
It is the area where the user selects the parameters upon which to act. To the right  
of each parameter, there is a square used to increase/decrease of its value.  
This way, when the focus is on the value of a variable on the main screen, pressing  
the vertical softkey "V+" will increase the parameter value in the amount set on the  
configuration screen.  
By default, the increase/decrease value of a parameter is initialized to 1.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.1.3 Configure and execute the oscilloscope function  
In the oscilloscope mode, from a single screen, it is possible to select the variables  
to be analyzed, the trigger conditions and the machine parameters of the CNC or the  
drive that may be modified.  
Operating procedure  
Execute a part-program to move the axis or axes to be adjusted. Once the program  
is running, go into the adjustment mode and access the oscilloscope function.  
13.  
Define the variables to be analyzed, the trigger conditions and the machine  
parameters of the CNC or the drive that may be modified.  
When capturing 1 or 2 variables of the same drive, the capture will be done  
by the drive itself and the CNC will be in charge of drawing the results.  
i
When capturing more than 2 variables or 2 variables from different drives, in  
order to synchronize data, the capture will be done by the CNC and the  
sampling period will be the CNC's cycle time.  
Data capture and later analysis of the data.  
Once the data capture has been interrupted or completed, it is possible to analyze  
the signals and modify the parameters that have been previously selected in order  
to improve the machining conditions.  
Repeat the capture, the analysis and the modification of parameters until obtaining  
the best machining conditions.  
Recommendations  
Execute endless repetitive movements. After adjusting the axes individually, readjust  
the interpolating axes together.  
The user must determine which is the best adjustment, the oscilloscope function is  
just an assistance tool.  
Operation  
To enter or modify a data on the screens, it must be selected; in other words, it must  
have the editing focus on it.  
Use the [©] [ª] keys to select another editable data or field. It is a rotary selection,  
if the [©] key pressed when the first element of the screen is selected, the focus goes  
to the last element whereas if the [ª] is pressed when the last element is selected,  
the focus goes to the first element.  
Not all the fields are editable, only the ones that may be selected can be edited, those  
having the focus. There are two types of editable fields:  
‡ Editable values:  
They may be assigned a value, either a two-digit number or alphanumeric  
(numbers and letters). Before validating the data, it is checked out and if it is not  
correct, it will not be accepted and a warning message will be issued.  
CNC 8070  
‡ Values that may be selected:  
The possible data are fixed one of them must be selected. Use the [¨] [§] keys  
to see the possible values. For this type of values that are icons, the [SPACE] key  
has the same effect as the [¨] key.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.1.4 Machine parameter editing  
Here is a list of machine parameters and variables of the drive that may be modified  
from the oscilloscope.  
The new values are assumed by the CNC after pressing [ENTER] and they are  
maintained until the unit is turned off. Once the setup is completed, the changes must  
be saved so they can be effective next time the CNC is turned on.  
Use the VALIDATEsoftkey to save the data. The CNC saves the new values in the  
CNC tables and/or in the drive tables accordingly.  
13.  
Axis or spindle machine parameters that may be edited  
The table indicates the parameters that will be assumed at the beginning of the next  
block. For this to be so, the instruction"#SYNC POS"must be programmed after each  
motion block.  
CNC  
PRELOAD  
PRELFITI  
TPROGAIN  
TINTIME  
Drive  
Associated variable  
MPG.PRELOAD[tandem]  
MPG.PRELFITI[tandem]  
MPG.TPROGAIN[tandem]  
MPG.TINTIME[tandem]  
MPG.TCOMPLIM[tandem]  
MPA.INPOSW.[set].axis  
MPA.BACKLASH.[set].axis  
MPA.G00FEED.[set].axis  
MPA.MAXVOLT.[set].axis  
MPA.PROGAIN.[set].axis  
MPA.FFGAIN.[set].axis  
MPA.MANFFGAIN.[set].axis  
MPA.ACFWFACTOR.[set].axis  
MPA.ACFGAIN.[set].axis  
MPA.MANACFGAIN.[set].axis  
MPA.LACC1.[set].axis  
Update  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
TCOMPLIM  
INPOSW  
Immediate  
Immediate  
BACKLASH  
G00FEED  
MAXVOLT  
PROGAIN  
FFGAIN  
PP58  
Immediate  
Beginning of next block  
Immediate  
PP104  
PP216  
PP216  
Immediate  
Immediate  
MANFFGAIN  
ACFWFACTOR  
ACFGAIN  
MANACFGAIN  
LACC1  
Immediate  
Immediate  
PP217  
PP217  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Beginning of next block  
Beginning of next block  
Beginning of next block  
Beginning of next block  
Beginning of next block  
Beginning of next block  
Beginning of next block  
Immediate  
LACC2  
MPA.LACC2.[set].axis  
LFEED  
MPA.LFEED.[set].axis  
ACCEL  
PP42  
PP42  
MPA.ACCEL.[set].axis  
DECEL  
MPA.DECEL.[set].axis  
ACCJERK  
DECJERK  
ESTDELAY  
SERVOOFF  
MINANOUT  
BAKANOUT  
BAKTIME  
MPA.ACCJERK.[set].axis  
MPA.DECJERK.[set].axis  
MPA.ESTDELAY.[set].axis  
MPA.SERVOOFF.[set].axis  
MPA.MINAOUT[.set].axis  
MPA.BAKANOUT.[set].axis  
MPA.BAKTIME.[set].axis  
CNC 8070  
Immediate  
Immediate  
PP2  
PP3  
Immediate  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
Immediate  
If the machine parameters are protected, when accessing any of them, the CNC will  
display a window requesting a password.  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Variables that may be modified at the Sercos drive  
Drive  
CP1  
Name  
CP1.axis  
Update  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
CP2  
CP2.axis  
CP3  
CP3.axis  
CP30  
CP31  
CP32  
NP1  
CP30[set].axis  
CP31[set].axis  
CP32[set].axis  
NP1.axis  
13.  
RP1  
RP1.axis  
RP2  
RP2.axis  
RP3  
RP3.axis  
RP4  
RP4.axis  
RP51  
RP52  
RP53  
RP54  
SP1  
RP51.axis  
RP52.axis  
RP53.axis  
RP54.axis  
SP1[set].axis  
SP2[set].axis  
SP50.axis  
SP51.axis  
TP10.axis  
TP11.axis  
TP12.axis  
TP13.axis  
TP14.axis  
SP2  
SP50  
SP51  
TP10  
TP11  
TP12  
TP13  
TP14  
Besides the parameters shown in the previous table, the user may access any  
variable having a writing permission ifhe knows its name. To do this, use the following  
nomenclature:  
Indicate the axis, the name of the parameter and the set separated by a period.  
When modifying any parameter of the previous table, the change is effective  
immediately without having to reset or restart the unit even when there is a program  
in execution.  
The drive parameters modified with this method are functional immediately, butthese  
values will be lost when the drive is turned off. Use the "Save to flash" option to  
maintain the modified values of those machine parameters.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Saving, loading and resetting the condigurations  
When defining a new configuration of variables to be displayed and parameters  
modified at the oscilloscope, the system allows saving that configuration into a file.  
Likewise, the system allows loading a configuration that was saved previously or  
resetting the current configuration.  
Save  
To save the current configuration, go to the configuration screen and press the "Save"  
softkey.  
13.  
After this, a new screen appears showing the available configurations with the focus  
on the last one.  
Also, it is possible to rename the new configuration whose extension must be "osc".  
Load  
To load a previously saved configuration, go to the configuration screen and press  
the "Load" softkey.  
Then, a new screen appears showing a list of previously saved configurations, being  
possible to select any of them.  
Reset  
Pressing the "Reset" softkey of the configuration screen deletes or initializes the  
current configuration. There are neither variables nor parameters selected and the  
rest of conditions (colors, trigger, etc.) assume the values assigned by default.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.2 The Bode diagram  
The Bode diagram is an assistance tool for adjusting the CNC and the drives. This  
utility may be used to obtain the Bode diagram of the response amplitude depending  
on the frequency of the input signal.  
With this tool, it is possible to insert a sinusoidal signal into an axis, so that changing  
the frequency and analyzing the response provides the behavior of the axes at  
different frequencies and will give the user an idea of how it behaves with any signal.  
This diagram may be used to check the system's gain, the bandwidth and the  
mechanical resonance. All this helps achieve the proper adjustment of the loops,  
analyze mechanical problems and check the final features.  
13.  
The Bode diagram is an assistance tool that only shows the response of the system  
to the various settings (adjustments); it is up to the technician to choose the best  
adjustment.  
How to access the Bode diagram  
The Bode diagram may be accessed from the softkey menu for setup assistance.  
Setup assistance  
Bode  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.2.1 Interface description  
The Bode screen looks like this with a single area for the graphics window that shows  
the Bode diagram.  
Besides the Bode diagram, the graphics window shows in dark blue the maximum  
and minimum gains, in black the gain and frequency values of each line of the grid  
and in light blue the maximum and minimum values obtained when analyzing the axis  
13.  
The colors mentioned earlier for the different data shown on the screen are  
the default ones. Use the "Options" softkey to change them.  
i
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Softkey menu  
There are some horizontal and vertical softkeys for changing the various options:  
Horizontal softkey menu  
The horizontal softkey menu offers the following options:  
13.  
‡ Softkey ANALYZE AXIS  
This softkey begins the estimation of the frequency response of the selected axis  
by means of the options.  
‡ Softkey END ANALYSIS  
This softkey ends the estimation of the frequency response of the selected axis  
by means of the options.  
‡ Softkey PRINT  
This softkey serves to send the Bode graph as a bitmap out to a printer or to a  
file. This makes it possible to print the screen. The border is removed when  
printing the screen.  
‡ Softkey CLEAR SCREEN  
This softkey initializes the graphics.  
‡ Softkey DIMENSIONS  
This softkey serves to modify the maximum and minimum gains represented in  
the graphics. Pressing this options displays a new menu with two horizontal  
softkeys.  
• Softkey EDIT  
This softkey serves to edit the limit values.  
• Softkey AUTOMATIC  
This softkey adjusts the limits to the maximum and minimum values obtained  
from analyzing the axis.  
‡ Softkey OPTIONS  
This softkey serves to configure the data forthe analysis and the way the graphics  
will look. This option gives access to the following configuration windows:  
1. Parameters window:  
This window may be used to configure the data used to analyze the axes.  
CNC 8070  
These data are:  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
Axis name: Name of the axis to be analyzed.  
Number of measurements: Number of measurements for each frequency (it  
shows the average between the maximum and the minimum response  
amplitudes of each repetition)  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Amplitude: Amplitude of the sinusoidal signal that is generated.  
% Jerk warning: Factor over the jerk parameter to issue the "jerk exceeded"  
warning.  
Settle T.: Waiting time from when it starts generating the signal for each  
frequency until the data is being taken into account.  
Initial frequency: Frequency from which the analysis begins.  
Final Frequency: Last frequency being analyzed.  
Pitch between Freq: The frequency being analyzed is incremented with this  
pitch (step) from the initial frequency until exceeding the final one thus  
completing the analysis.  
13.  
2. Aspect window:  
This window serves to configure the way the graphics will look.  
The fields that may be configured are:  
Grid: Display/Hide the grid.  
NumGridX: Number of horizontal lines of the grid.  
NumGridY: Number of vertical lines of the grid.  
Title: Title of the graph.  
Log: Gain in decibels and logarithmic representation in frequency.  
3. Colors window:  
This window serves to configure the colors of the graphics.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
Graphics color: Background color of the graph.  
Background color: Background color of the control.  
Data color: Color of the captured data.  
Text color: Text color of the graph.  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Axis color: Grid color.  
Vertical softkey menu  
When defining a new configuration, the system permits saving that configuration in  
a file. Likewise, the system permits loading a previously saved configuration.  
The vertical softkey menu offers the options to save and load configurations:  
‡ Softkey SAVE  
13.  
Press the "save" softkey to save the current configuration.  
After this, a new screen appears showing the available configurations.  
It is also possible to rename the new configuration.  
‡ Softkey LOAD  
Press the "load" softkey to load a previously saved configuration.  
Then, a new screen appears showing a list of previously saved configurations,  
being possible to select any of them.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.3 The circularity (roundness) test  
This toolhelps improveand adjust the axis reversalpeak, an effect thatappearswhen  
the axes reverse their moving direction. With this utility, a circle may be executed with  
the axes and graphically show the result. This graphic shows the difference between  
the actual (real) coordinate obtained from the feedback device and the theoretical  
coordinate calculated at each point. This difference is shown projected radially.  
The same screen showing the graphics also shows the machine parameters that  
affect the movement reversal. These parameters may be modified while running the  
test, thus being possible to evaluate the response of the system to these changes  
and optimize the adjustment on the go.  
13.  
The circularity (roundness) test diagram is an assistance tool that only shows the  
response of the system to the various settings (adjustments); it is up to the technician  
to choose the best adjustment.  
How to access the circularity (roundness) test  
The circularity (roundness) test may be accessed from the softkey menu for setup  
assistance.  
Setup assistance  
Circularity (roundness)  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.3.1 Interface description  
The screen of the circularity test looks like this, with two clearly different parts. A  
graphics window that shows the result of the test and a data area for interacting with  
the system.  
13.  
The graphics window  
It is the area that shows, graphically, the result of the test.  
The graphic shows the two moving axes and the theoretical circle of the interpolation  
that will be carried out. As the test is being run, the positioning error at each point  
is drawn on the circle. This error is shown projected radially.  
Superimposed on the graphics, it shows the following additional data that is updated  
by the CNC.  
• The real coordinates of the axes.  
• Programmed feedrate and % applied.  
• Diameter of the displayed circle.  
• Maximum and minimum error over the theoretical radius and angular position  
where it has been detected.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
The data area  
Itis the area where the userinteractswith the system. Itoffers asetofdata for defining  
the graphic environment, the subroutine that will be used to generate the machine  
movement and the machine parameters involved in the adjustment. Selecting one  
of the data frames the group of parameters it belongs to.  
Graphic environment data to be configured  
13.  
• Number of divisions on both sides of the theoretical circle.  
• Scale or value in microns of each division.  
• Error margin. Percentage of the area that is occupied by the error margin  
(divisions area).  
See "Machine parameter editing" on page 277.  
Movement subroutine  
The circular interpolation is carried outusing a subroutine. See"Define and execute  
the movement subroutine" on page 291.  
The following data is taken into consideration when executing the subroutine.  
• Plane where the circle is executed.  
• Circle center coordinates.  
• Circle radius.  
• Programmed feedrate.  
• Turning direction.  
Parameters to be set  
To make the adjustment, it is possible to change the CNC machine parameters or the  
drive machine parameters involved. See "Adjustment of the machine parameters  
involved" on page 293.  
It is possible to interact with up to 11 different machine parameters. Some of these  
parameters are always visible, but some may be defined at will. For each parameter,  
it shows its value on each axis of the work plane.  
To see the whole list of parameters that may be defined, see section  
"13.3.8 Machine parameters that may be modified".  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Softkey menu  
Horizontal softkey menu  
The horizontal softkey menu offers the following options.  
‡ Softkey SIMPLE.  
It captures the data of a full circle.  
‡ Softkey CONTINUOUS.  
13.  
It captures data continuously.  
‡ Softkey STOP  
It stops the data capture. This softkey is shown when data capture is running.  
This softkey only stops the data capture. It does not stop the movement of the  
axes. To stop the movement of the axes, press the [STOP] key of the operator  
panel.  
i
‡ Softkey CLEAR  
It deletes the graphic representation. It may be done while the capture is running;  
in that case, it goes on with the graphic representation.  
‡ Softkey LOAD.  
It loads a previously saved configuration.  
‡ Softkey SAVE.  
It saves the configuration defined.  
Vertical softkey menu  
The vertical softkey menu offers the following options.  
‡ Softkey VALIDATE.  
It saves the values of the machine parameters in the tables of the CNC and/or  
the drive accordingly.  
When changing the values of the machine parameters, the changes are effective  
immediately. However, these changes are maintained only during the current  
session of the CNC; i.e. until the unit is turned off. On power-up, it assumes the  
values stored in the tables.  
‡ Softkey INITIALIZE.  
It resets the window data to its default values.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.3.2 Configuring and executing the circularity (roundness) test  
The process consists in executing a circle with the axes of the machine and verifying  
it on its graphic representation. The graphic shows the difference between the actual  
(real) coordinate obtained from the feedback device and the theoretical coordinate  
calculated in that point. This difference is shown projected radially.  
The interpolation of the machine axes and the point capture for the graphics are  
initiated separately. The data capture is handled from the softkey menu whereas the  
movement of the axes is controlled from the operator panel.  
13.  
The adjustment process is repeated until obtaining the best adjustment of the axes.  
The circularity (roundness) test diagram is an assistance tool that only shows the  
response of the system to the various settings (adjustments); it is up to the technician  
to choose the best adjustment.  
How to execute the circularity (roundness) test  
Basically it is done as follows. Each of these points is described in more detail in the  
indicated chapter.  
The configuration used may be saved in a file for later.  
1. Before initiating the process, certain aspects must be configured as well as the  
graphic environment, the circular interpolation, the values of the parameters  
involved, etc. See "13.1.4 Machine parameter editing" on page 277.  
A previously saved configuration may be used.  
2. Execute a circular interpolation of the machine axes. The axes must be moving  
before the data capture starts. See "13.3.4 Define and execute the movement  
subroutine" on page 291.  
3. Initiate the data capture and the graphic simulation. Once the axes are moving,  
the data capture for the graphics may begin. While capturing data, the position  
error at each point is drawn on the graphics. See "13.3.5 Data capture for the  
graphic" on page 292.  
4. Optimize the adjustment by changing some machine parameters of the CNC or  
of the drive. This makes it possible to evaluate the system response to these  
changes and optimizethe adjustment. See"13.3.6 Adjustment of the machine  
parameters involved" on page 293.  
5. Save the modified values and the configuration used. See "13.3.7 Validate the  
changes and save the configuration used" on page 295.  
Move through the data  
To enter or modify a data, it must be selected; i.e. it must have the editing focus on  
it. To select a data, use the [§][¨][©][ª] keys.  
The data are accepted with the [ENTER] key. Before accepting a data, it is checked  
out and if the data is not correct, it is not accepted.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.3.3 Configure the graphic environment  
This operation may be carried out before or during the test. If they are modified during  
the test, the screen is cleared and the graphic representation goes on.  
The following graphic characteristics may be defined from the data window.  
• Number of divisions on both sides of the theoretical circle.  
• Scale or value in microns of each division.  
• Error margin. Percentage of the area that is occupied by the error margin  
(divisions area).  
13.  
Initialize the data  
When accessing the circularity test, it assumes the values used last. Pressing the  
INITIALIZEsoftkey restores the default values.  
Number of divisions  
Scale:  
5
10 microns/division  
50 %  
Error margin:  
Bear in mind that the softkey INITIALIZE initializes all the data of the  
window, including the values of the machine parameters.  
i
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.3.4 Define and execute the movement subroutine  
In order to run the test, the axes of the machine must be executing a circular  
interpolation. The axes must be moving before initiating the point capture and they  
must keep moving during the whole process. To achieve this, a repetitive movement  
must be executed.  
The movement of the axes is managed from the operator panel. The softkey  
menu only controls the data capture for the graphics.  
i
13.  
Subroutine associated with the circularity test  
The circular interpolation is executed with the subroutine associated with the  
circularity test. This subroutine is located in the folder "C:\CNC8070 \MTB \SUB  
\testcirc_vx.nc", where vx indicates the subroutine version and neither its name nor  
its location must be changed. This subroutine may be modified by the OEM to adapt  
it to his needs.  
Some data of the subroutine are defined in this window.  
• Plane where the circle is executed.  
• Circle center coordinates.  
• Circle radius.  
• Programmed feedrate.  
• Turning direction of the axes. The turning direction is given by an icon. To change  
the turning direction, place the focus on the icon and press [SPACE].  
Execute the associated subroutine  
Press the [START] key to execute the subroutine. The subroutine data cannot be  
modified while it is being executed. The movement must be stopped before editing  
any of the data.  
When trying to execute the subroutine, if it is not in its pre-established location, the  
CNC interprets that it does not exist and it creates a predefined one.  
Example of a subroutine  
The following example executes a repetitive circular movement in the XY plane. In  
this case, the repetitive movement is carried out in an endless loop using the "GOTO"  
command. The movement is stopped with the [STOP] key of the operator panel.  
%testcirc_V1  
G1 G5 X0 Y0 F1000  
N10:  
G2 X0 Y0 I10 J0  
$GOTO N10  
M29  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.3.5 Data capture for the graphic  
Once the graphic representation has been defined and the machine axes are being  
interpolated, the point capture for the graphics may begin.  
The point capture is initiated from the softkey menu. The point capture may be either  
simple, where the graph is made once (a single whole circle), or continuous where  
the graph is redrawn for every interpolation of the machine (after every whole circle).  
When capturing points in the circularity test, they are not drawn on the  
graphics of the CNC.  
13.  
i
The machine parameters may be modified while capturing points. See "Adjustment  
of the machine parameters involved" on page 293.  
Simple data capture  
Data capture is initiated with the SIMPLE softkey. It deletes the graph and starts  
drawing the circularity error enlarged to the defined scale.  
The capture ends after a whole circle or when the STOPsoftkey is pressed.  
Continuous point capture  
Data capture is initiated with the CONTINUOUS softkey. It deletes the graph and  
starts drawing the circularity error enlarged to the defined scale.  
The capture ends when the STOP softkey is pressed.  
When modifying the machine parameters, it is possible to see the new graph over  
the previous one or press the CLEARkey to only see the new one.  
Stop the point capture  
Press the STOP softkey to stop the data capture. It stops the simple or continuous  
data capture at any time.  
This softkey only stops the data capture. It does not stop the movement of the  
axes. To stop the movement of the axes, press the [STOP] key of the operator  
panel.  
i
Once the data capture is completed, two lines are drawn on the graph indicating the  
angular position of the maximum and minimum error.  
Delete the graphic representation  
Use the CLEARsoftkey to delete the graph. It deletes the graph and the data shown  
over it.  
CNC 8070  
It may be pressed at any time, even while it is being drawn.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.3.6 Adjustment of the machine parameters involved  
The best adjustment of the backlash peak may require modifying the value of certain  
machine parameters. This may be done directly in this window, thus without having  
to go to the machine parameter table.  
When turning the CNC on, it assumes the new values in the CNC tables and/or in  
the drive tables accordingly. When changing these values, the changes are effective  
immediately and are assumed by the CNC until the unit is turned off. Once the setup  
is completed, the changes must be validated so they can be effective next time the  
CNC is turned on.  
13.  
The parameters may be modified before or during the test.  
Selection of the parameters to be displayed  
It is possible to interact with up to 11 different machine parameters. Some of these  
parameters are always visible, but some may be defined at will. However, the CNC  
will only admit the valid parameters for this type of adjustment.  
BACKLASH  
BAKANOUT  
BAKTIME  
Additional velocity command pulse  
Duration of the additional velocity command pulse  
To see the whole list of parameters that may be defined, see section  
"13.3.8 Machine parameters that may be modified". When using Fagor Sercos  
drives, the drive parameters may also be adjusted.  
How to select the parameters  
The parameter setting area shows three data columns. The parameters are defined  
in the first column. The rest of the fields show the parameter value for each axis.  
The list of valid parameters is shown when editing a parameter or pressing [SPACE].  
Use the [©][ª]keystomovethrough the list and [ENTER] to selectone of them. Once  
selected, the rest of the fields show the parameter value for each axis.  
To select the parameters of the drive, simply write their names.  
Save the value of the parameters  
The new data is assumed by the CNC until the unit is turned off. Once the setup is  
completed, the changes must be saved so they can be effective next time the CNC  
is turned on.  
Use the VALIDATEsoftkey to save the data. The CNC saves the new values in the  
CNC tables and/or in the drive tables accordingly.  
When quitting the circularity test without having saved the parameters, the CNC will  
show a message warning about it and will give a chance to save them.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Password-protected parameters  
If the machine parameters are protected, a password will be requested when trying  
to modify them. If entered correctly, it stores it and it does not request it again unless  
the CNC is turned off. If the password is wrong, the values cannot be modified and  
it requests it again every time.  
The test may be executed even when not knowing the access password, but the  
machine parameters cannot be changed.  
The access passwords are determined from the utilities mode.  
13.  
Initialize the value of the parameters  
When turning the CNC on, it assumes the new values set by the manufacturer in the  
CNC tables and/or in the drive tables accordingly. The values used the last time will  
be kept for when accessing the test again later.  
Pressing the INITIALIZEsoftkey sets the values assigned to the parameters as  
"default values" in the tables, not those set by the manufacturer.  
BearinmindthattheINITIALIZE softkeyinitializesalthedataofthewindow.  
i
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.3.7 Validate the changes and save the configuration used  
Validate the parameters  
The new data is assumed by the CNC until the unit is turned off. Once the setup is  
completed, the changes must be saved so they can be effective next time the CNC  
is turned on.  
Use the VALIDATEsoftkey to save the data. The CNC saves the new values in the  
CNC tables and/or in the drive tables accordingly.  
13.  
When quitting the circularity test without having saved the parameters, the CNC will  
show a message warning about it and will give a chance to save them.  
Save and load the configuration  
The system permits saving the current configuration into a file in ASCII format  
(extension "TST"). This file only contains the configuration. It contains neither the  
graphics nor the values of the machine parameters. When loading a configuration,  
the parameters assume the value they have at the time.  
The configuration saving option does not update the machine parameter  
table. To do that, use the VALIDATEsoftkey.  
i
Save the configuration  
Press the SAVEsoftkey to save the current configuration. Select the folder and the  
file name and press [ENTER]. If there is a configuration already saved with the same  
name, it will ask whether it is to be replaced or not.  
By default, the configuration is saved in the folder "C:\CNC8070 \MTB \DATA" or in  
the last folder selected by the user.  
Load the configuration  
Press the LOADsoftkey to load a previously saved configuration. Select the folder  
and the file name and press [ENTER].  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
13.3.8 Machine parameters that may be modified  
General machine parameters  
Parameter  
Units  
Update  
PRELFITI  
PRELOAD  
TCOMPLIM  
TINTIME  
ms  
%
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
Immediate  
%
13.  
ms  
%
TPROGAIN  
Axis machine parameter  
Parameter  
Units  
Update  
BACKLASH  
BAKANOUT  
BAKTIME  
ACCEL  
mm(inch) or degrees  
Immediate  
Immediate  
rpm  
ms  
Immediate  
mm(inch)/s2 or degrees/s2  
Beginning of the next block  
Beginning of the next block  
Immediate  
ACCJERK  
ACFGAIN  
ACFWFACTOR  
DECEL  
mm(inch)/s3 or degrees/s3  
%
ms  
mm(inch)/s2 or degrees/s2  
mm(inch)/s3 or degrees/s3  
%
Immediate  
Beginning of the next block  
Beginning of the next block  
Immediate  
DECJERK  
FFGAIN  
G00FEED  
INPOSW  
mm(inch) or degrees  
mm(inch) or degrees  
mm(inch)/s2 or degrees/s2  
mm(inch)/s2 or degrees/s2  
mm(inch) or degrees  
%
Beginning of the next block  
Immediate  
LACC1  
Beginning of the next block  
Beginning of the next block  
Beginning of the next block  
Immediate  
LACC2  
LFEED  
MANACFGAIN  
MANFFGAIN  
MAXVOLT  
PROGAIN  
SERVOOFF  
%
Immediate  
mV  
Immediate  
1000/min  
Immediate  
Immediate  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DDSSETUP  
14  
This operating mode may be used to set up Sercos drives by editing their parameters  
and variables.  
DDSSetup mode selection  
The DDSSetup mode may be accessed either using the user key customized for it  
or from the tasks window. The task window may be accessed with key combination  
[CTRL]+[A].  
What can you do in this work mode?  
In short, this operating mode offers the following operations:  
• See the list of Sercos drives connected to the CNC.  
• Change the access level for drive parameters.  
• View and change the parameters and variables of the drives.  
• Display the list of errors being generated by the drive.  
• Monitor in real time the value of the drive variables.  
• View the status of the operation being carried out at the drive and the status of  
the digital inputs and outputs.  
• Generate velocity commands.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.1 Appearance of the DDSSetup mode  
When this operating mode is active, it will be indicated at the top right side of the  
general status bar.  
This operating mode consists of several services. As these services are being  
activated, they overlap each other. If several services active, it is possible to switch  
from one to another using the relevant key, if it has been set accordingly.  
The active servicesare switched in a rotary manner, in such awaythat whenpressing  
on the last active service, it shows the first one.  
14.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.1.1 Screen description  
The DDSSetup screen shows the following information.  
A
14.  
B
C
A. Title bar that shows the name of the active service.  
B. Main window.  
C. Command bar.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.1.2 Vertical softkey menu (icons)  
List of drives.  
Shows the list of Sercos drives connected to the CNC. It shows a short description  
of each drive.  
Drive accessing level change.  
14.  
Change the access level for drive parameters and variables. This softkey shows a  
window that requests the password to quit the basic level and access a new level.  
"Parameters and variables" service.  
Shows the list of parameters and variables of the drive. You may choose whether to  
show the list of parameters, the list of variables or both.  
"Error management" service.  
It shows the list of errors detected by the drive. The errors are shown in the order they  
come up.  
It is also possible to disable some errors.  
"Monitoring" service.  
It shows a list of variables that are selected by the user.  
"Information" service.  
This service monitors the status of the operation being carried out at the drive and  
the status of the digital inputs and outputs of the drive.  
Command simulator.  
This option may be used to configure and start up the internal command generator  
of the drive.  
Select the command bar.  
It directly selects the command bar of the DDSSetup. From the command bar, it is  
possible to execute different commands of the drive, check variables and modify their  
value is they may be written.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.2 List of drives  
This service shows a list of Sercos drives connected to the CNC. For each drive, it  
shows the name of the axis associated with it, its identifier and a short description  
for it, such as software version, motor ID and the ID of the drive itself.  
This screen is the one shown by default when accessing the DDSSetup. It can also  
be accessed from any other service using the relevant softkey.  
14.  
The commandbar is located at the bottom of the window. See "14.3 Command bar"  
on page 302.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.3 Command bar  
The command bar is available in various services of the DDSSetup mode. From the  
command bar, it is possible to execute different commands of the drive, check  
variables and modify their value is they may be written.  
The command bar may be selected with the window changing key, same as the rest  
of the screen elements or using its associated softkey.  
Executing commands of the drive  
14.  
The drop list offers the following commands. To execute one of them, select it from  
the list and press [ENTER].  
• Resetting errors.  
• Setting the encoder simulator reference mark (I0).  
• Transferring parameters from RAM to Flash.  
• Autophasing.  
• Validating.  
• Calculating friction and inertia.  
• Auto-calibration of the HomeSwitch .  
• Soft Reset.  
• Saving parameters at the encoder.  
Consulting and modifying drive variables  
Read-only variables may be consulted (those with the "R" indicator on the attributes  
column). Read-write variables may be consulted and/or edited (those with the "RW"  
indicator on the attributes column). See "14.5 –Parameters and variables–  
service." on page 305.  
Ifavariable has beenwritten, pressing[ENTER] readsitsvalue. Ifavalueisassigned  
to a variable, when pressing [ENTER], it assumes the new value.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Variables may be identified using their mnemonic or their Sercos identifier. Refer to  
the drive's manual to know the list of available variables.  
PV210  
Consulting the PV210 variable.  
S36  
Consulting the variable SV1 (Sercos ID = 36).  
It assigns the value of 23 to the variable RV9.  
It assigns the value of 100 to variable S36 (Sercos ID = 36).  
RV9 = 23  
S36 = 100  
Ifnotindicatedotherwise, itaccessesthevariablesofthedriveselectedin theservice.  
To access those of a particular drive, select it in the service or add a suffix with the  
axis name to the mnemonic (or Sercos ID).  
14.  
PV210.Y  
S36.S  
It consults the variable PV210 of the Y axis drive.  
Consulting variable (Sercos ID = 16) of the spindle drive.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.4 Changing the drives accessing level  
The parameters, variables and commands of the drive are organized by access  
levels. To access each parameter, the drive must be configured at the access level  
required by that parameter. A password is needed to access each level.  
This softkey is used to change the access level for drive parameters. Pressing this  
softkey shows a window thatrequests the password to quit the basic level and access  
a new level.  
14.  
The available access levels are the following:  
• Basic level (USER)  
Itis the defaultlevel, itisaccessed when entering the DDSSetup mode. It requires  
no password.  
The user level gives access to a group of parameters that slightly changes the  
operation of the drive.  
• Intermediate level (OEM)  
This level gives access to a large group of parameters that depend on the motor  
connected, they set how the electronics of the drive is adapted to that motor.  
• Maximum level (FAGOR)  
This level gives full access to all the variables, parameters and commands of the  
system.  
The Fagor level gives access to a group of parameters depending on the  
drive's electronics and they factory set.  
Only technicians from Fagor Automation are granted a FAGOR access level.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.5 –Parameters and variables– service.  
This service shows the list of parameters and/or variables of the drive. It is selected  
with the VIEW softkey of the horizontal menu.  
14.  
The commandbar is located at the bottom of the window. See "14.3 Command bar"  
on page 302.  
Selection of the elements to be displayed  
The VIEW softkey of the horizontal menu may be used to choose displaying either  
the parameters and variables, only the parameters or only the variables.  
From the top of the window, it is possible to select:  
• The drive whose parameters and/or variables are to be consulted.  
• The group of parameters and/or variables to work with. Once selected, the list will  
show the elements of the selected group.  
• The set of parameters to be consulted. Those parameters and/or variables that  
havesetswilldisplaythevaluesofthatset. Also, itsidentifierwillshowtheselected  
set (e.g. for set 4 of the variable SP2, it will show SP2.4)  
Parameters with a set will not be affected by the change.  
List of variables and parameters  
The list of variables and parameters offers the following information.  
• Mnemonic of the variable or of the parameter.  
• Current value at the drive.  
• Units being used.  
• Valid range of values. If it is a string of characters, it will show the maximum length  
permitted.  
• Sercos identifier.  
• Name of the variable or of the parameter.  
Editing the values  
The values, of parameters or variables with write permission are edited in the Value  
field. If the new value is accepted, the list shows the change.  
CNC 8070  
The changes are saved in the drive's RAM memory. To save the change permanently,  
use the "DATA + FLASH" option of the horizontal menu.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
How to make a backup copy of the data  
The DATA softkey of the horizontal menu offers a series of options to make a backup  
copy of the values.  
• The SAVEsoftkey saves the values of the parameters and variables into a file.  
• The LOAD softkey restores the values of the parameters and variables from a  
previously saved file.  
14.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.6 –Error management– service.  
This service shows the list of errors detected by the drive. The errors are shown in  
the order they come up.  
Once the cause of the error has been corrected, the errors may be reset with the  
ERROR RESETsoftkey of the horizontal menu.  
14.  
The commandbar is located at the bottom of the window. See "14.3 Command bar"  
on page 302.  
Disabling the errors  
To disable an error of the drive, use the ERROR LISTINGsoftkey of the horizontal  
menu. This softkey shows the whole list of possible errors. To disable the desired  
ones, checkmark the box on the left.  
Then, press the SENDsoftkey to send the list to the drive. To make the error disabling  
effective, execute the command DC1 (reset errors) from the command bar.  
Disabling the errors requires an OEM or FAGOR access level. See "14.4 Changing  
the drives accessing level" on page 304. Even then, only resettable errors may be  
disabled, even if the list also shows the non-resettable errors.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.7 –Monitoring– service  
This service monitors the value of the parameters and variables of the drive. The user  
selects the variables and parameters to be monitored.  
14.  
The command bar is located atthe bottom ofthe window. See "14.3 Command bar"  
on page 302.  
List of variables or parameters  
The ADD softkey shows a window where one can select the variables or parameters  
to be monitored and they will be shown on the screen. Variables and parameters of  
any drive may be selected.  
Use the INITIALIZE softkey to clear the whole list. To delete a variable or  
parameter from the list, select it and press the [DEL] key.  
The SAVEsoftkey saves the list into a file and theLOADsoftkey restores the list from  
a file.  
Monitoring the status of variables or parameters  
Press the STARTsoftkey of the horizontal menu to start monitoring. Press the STOP  
softkey to stop monitoring.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.8 –Information– service  
This service monitors two types of information. It shows the status of the operation  
being carried out atthe drive, on the other hand it shows the status ofthe digital inputs  
and outputs of the drive.  
The commandbar is located at the bottom of the window. See "14.3 Command bar"  
on page 302.  
14.  
Monitoring the status of the operations of the drive  
TheOPERATION STATUSsoftkeyofthehorizontalmenugivesaccesstothisoption.  
This screen monitors the status of the operation being carried out at the drive. The  
drive whose operations are to be monitored is selected at the top of the window.  
There is a led for each operation and it shows the status of the operation at the drive.  
Green led  
Black led  
Operation active.  
Operation inactive.  
Monitoring the status of the operations of the drive  
The DIGITAL I/Osoftkey of the horizontal menu gives access to this option.  
This screen monitors the status of the digitalinputs and outputs of the drive. The drive  
whose digital I/O's are to be monitored is selected at the top of the window.  
CNC 8070  
There is a led for each digital input and output of the drive and it shows its status.  
Green led  
Black led  
Input or output active.  
Input or output inactive.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
Type of inputs and outputs  
The inputs and outputs may be grouped as follows.  
• Inputs and outputs that cannot be assigned.  
These inputs and outputs indicate the status of the drive's control signals.  
Speed enable  
LSC Status  
Drive enable  
DR. OK  
Error Reset  
PROG. OK  
Master Halt  
Master Speed Enable  
Torque Status  
Master Drive Enable  
14.  
• Inputs and outputs that may be assigned.  
Variables and/or parameters of the drive may be associated with inputs and  
outputs (analog and digital).  
Those digital outputs that have not been associated with any parameter or  
variable may be forced to become active or inactive using the button on the left  
of their led.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.9 Command generator  
This option may be used to configure and start up the internal command generator  
of the drive. In the configuration, it is possible to establish the shape of the signal,  
its amplitude, period, etc.  
Selected drive  
14.  
Configuration of the command  
generator.  
Turn the command generator  
on.  
The fields to be configured at the generator are:  
Shape  
To select the type of signal to be generated with the drive  
(sinusoidal or square).  
Amplitude  
Frequency  
Offset  
Signal amplitude.  
Signal frequency.  
Signal Offset.  
Waves  
Number of waves to generate. When set to 0 (zero), the  
waves are generated continuously, without interruption.  
Duty Cycle  
Percentage of the wave at 1/0 (only on squarewaves).  
The internal command generator is turned on and off using the lower buttons.  
It turns the command generator on.  
It turns the command generator off.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
14.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGNOSIS  
15  
This operating mode may be used to test the hardware and software of the PC that  
the CNC is based upon.  
• System information.  
• Information about the modules that make up the CNC software.  
• Information about the elements connected to the CNC through the CAN bus and  
SERCOS.  
The diagnosis is a testing and displaying tool; it cannot be used to modify the  
displayed values.  
Diagnosis mode selection  
The diagnosis mode may be accessed either using the user key customized for it or  
from the tasks window. The task window may be accessed with key combination  
[CTRL]+[A].  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
15.1 Appearance of the diagnosis mode  
When this operating mode is active, it will be indicated at the top right side of the  
general status bar.  
This operating mode may be displayed with several screens. Each one corresponds  
to an element of the CNC configuration.  
Standard configuration  
15.  
The standard configuration of this work mode, described in this manual corresponds  
to the one supplied by Fagor. In some cases, the manual shows a sample screen,  
instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
15.1.1 Screen description  
The diagnosis screen shows the following information.  
15.  
A
B
C
A. It shows the hardware and software configuration of the CNC.  
System diagnosis:Information onthe systemelements;CNC version, username,  
microprocessor(s) used, status of the various system memories, etc.  
Software diagnosis: Information about the modules that make up the CNC  
software and the software options installed.  
CNC8070 diagnosis: Information about the elements connected to the CNC  
through the Can bus and Sercos (drives, input/output cards, etc.).  
B. Diagnosis of the selected element.  
C. CNC messages.  
To switch windows, press the relevant key.  
After selecting an element of the configuration  
Hide or display the list of resources of an element.  
To move the cursor through the elements of the list.  
To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
15.1.2 Icon description (vertical softkeys)  
The icon menu always shows all the icons related to this work mode.  
The icons are activated with their associated softkey (F8 to F12).  
List of icons  
15.  
Update data  
It is used to update (refresh) the data of the diagnosis window.  
Print table  
It prints the information of the configuration out to a printer connected to the CNC or  
as a file at the CNC (in *.PRN format).  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
15.2 Configuration diagnosis  
15.2.1 System diagnosis  
When selecting this configuration element, the diagnosis window shows the list of the  
system elements and their values.  
A
B
15.  
(A) System elements.  
(B) Element values.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
15.2.2 Software diagnosis  
This option may be used to analyze the modules that make up the CNC software and  
the software options installed.  
Module information  
When selecting this configuration element, the diagnosis window shows the listof the  
modules that make up the CNC software.  
15.  
A
B
(A) Modules listing.  
(B) Detailed information of the selected module.  
It shows the size of each module (in bytes) and the date it was created. When  
selecting a module from the list, the bottom of the screen shows more detailed  
information.  
Software options  
When selecting this element of the configuration, the diagnosis window shows the  
software options currently installed.  
It also shows the horizontal softkey VALIDATION CODE for entering the resulting  
validation code according to the hardware ID of the unit and the desired options.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
318  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
15.2.3 Hardware diagnosis. CAN bus and SERCOS  
When selecting this element of the configuration, the diagnosis window shows the  
software identification of the CNC's communications board (version, boot,  
checksum) and the type of buses connected to it. Likewise, it monitors the different  
voltage and temperature alarms.  
15.  
Sercos bus configuration  
• Listing of nodes and drive associated with each one of them.  
For each drive, it indicates its software version, type of drive and the motor  
connected to it.  
Can bus configuration  
• Resources connected and their status.  
• Groups connected and number of nodes that make up each group (detected and  
active).  
Detailed information of the selected group.  
• Group resources and their status.  
• Information about the nodes that make up the group.  
Detailed information of the selected node.  
• Software version, boot and checksum of the code.  
• Node status.  
• Resources of each module.  
The symbol next to the node indicates its status and its possible association.  
Active.  
CNC 8070  
Active, but in error.  
Inactive.  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
15.3 Sercos diagnosis  
General information about the bus  
General purpose, it shows the following information about the Sercos bus.  
SERCON chip version.  
Version  
Loop time  
Time between two synchronization messages (MST). It is the same as general  
parameter LOOPTIME.  
15.  
T2  
Time from the MST until the CNC starts sending the telegram with the position  
commands (MDT).  
T3  
Time from the MST until the drives have the position commands.  
Time from the MST when the drives read the feedback values.  
Time from the MST until the RT IT takes place at the CNC.  
Distortion error counter at the CNC.  
T4  
TL  
Distortion errors  
Ring errors  
Phase  
Sercos ring error counter.  
Current Sercos phase.  
Phase status  
Logic ID and name  
Phase status (0 = OK).  
Name and driveID (number of the rotary switch) of the Sercos axes.  
General information about the bus  
It shows the following information for each drive.  
General information  
T1  
Time from the MST until the drive starts sending its telegram (AT).  
Contents of the drive's control word.  
Control word  
Status word  
Name  
Contents of the drive's status word.  
Name of the Sercos axis.  
Error information  
"Reset Hard" counter  
Distortion errors  
AT errors  
Number of times that the drive has been reset.  
Counter of distortion errors detected at the drive.  
Counters of AT reception errors of each drive.  
Information on the last operation carried out by the service channel  
ID  
Processed Sercos ID.  
CNC 8070  
Element  
Processed data (Name, Units, min/max Value, Status, Value, Attributes).  
Operation carried out (Read, Write).  
Process  
Command status  
Error code  
In processes with commands, it indicates its status.  
Operation error code (0 = OK).  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
320  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
15.4 Save the CAN configuration for the start-up test.  
Saving a CAN configuration to a file serves to check the CAN configuration is correct  
when starting the system up. The CAN configuration must only be saved to a file after  
having verified that it is correct.  
Save the CAN configuration.  
When the CAN bus level is selected, it shows the SAVEsoftkey that may be used to  
save the current CAN configuration. The configuration is saved in the file C:\Cnc8070  
\mtb \data \canData.tab.  
15.  
This file contains the number of groups present in the bus, the number of modules,  
the number of inputs and outputs, etc.  
Verify the CAN configuration during power-up.  
To verify the configuration, the information must be previously saved to the file  
canData.tab.  
During the power-up process, the data saved in the canData.tab file is compared with  
the data read during power-up. If when comparing the data, they are not the same,  
the corresponding error message is issued.  
"The CAN configuration is not the same as the one saved in the file"  
Once the error is detected, it will keep coming up even after a reset. There two ways  
to correct the error:  
• Power up the CNC again with the original CAN configuration; the one saved in  
the canData.tab file  
• Save the new CAN configuration. The CAN configuration must only be saved to  
a file after having verified that it is correct.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
15.5 Generate a report with the system information  
A report with all the information offered by the diagnosis mode may be obtained from  
any section of the diagnosis mode. This information may be printed or saved to a file.  
This produces a document with all the information about the FAGOR system installed  
on a machine such as the software version, status of the remote modules, installed  
drives and motors, etc.  
To print the information, use the "Print" icon. When pressing this icon, the CNC will  
show a dialog box requesting the print destination for the document (printer or file).  
15.  
When printing to a file, it is possible to select the name and location of the file.  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
322  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‡ ‡ ‡ Operating manual  
CNC 8070  
(SOFT V03.0X)  
324  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Coleman Tent 2000010319 User Manual
Craftsman Air Compressor 91919541 User Manual
CTX Oven TCO21140035 User Manual
Cuisinart Food Processor DFP 3 User Manual
Curtis Clock Radio SCR4503 User Manual
Desa Water Heater CGD3018N CGD3924N CGD3930N CRL2718N CCL3924N CRL3124N CCL3018N CGD3924NT CGD3018NT CCL3924NT CGD3930NT CCL3018NT CCL3930NTA User Manual
Extron electronic Stereo Amplifier DA AV EQ User Manual
Extron electronic Switch DFX 100 User Manual
Fender Musical Instrument Amplifier SIXTY User Manual
Fisher Paykel Oven DI1203 User Manual